# CommandSection

title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>msgen</i> focuses on creating <i>syntactically correct</i> messages, but it does not handle sending them; it outputs to standard output. RFC compliance is a primary goal, so unexpected input might lead to strict formatting or errors. When using the <b>--encode</b> option, <i>msgen</i> attempts to determine the best encoding (Base64 or Quoted-Printable) based on the content. It is part of the <i>mailutils</i> package, so it may not be universally available on all Linux systems by default and might require separate installation.


title: OUTPUT BEHAVIOR
content:
<i>msgen</i> prints the fully formed RFC 822/2822 message to standard output. This output can then be piped to another command like <b>sendmail</b> or <b>mail</b> for actual delivery or further processing.


title: HEADER PRECEDENCE
content:
Headers specified as command-line options (e.g., via <b>-s</b> for Subject) take precedence over auto-generated ones. Explicit <b>NAME: VALUE</b> pairs provided as non-option arguments have the highest precedence, allowing users to override headers set by options like <b>-s</b> or <b>-t</b>, or to add arbitrary new headers.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>msgen</i> is a component of the GNU Mailutils project, which aims to provide a robust and interoperable set of mail utilities for Linux and Unix-like systems. Its development began in the late 1990s, evolving as a modern successor to older, less standardized mail tools. The command specifically addresses the need for a programmatic and precise way to construct RFC-compliant email messages. This is crucial for automated scripts, mail gateways, and advanced mail processing, especially as email standards evolved to support various character sets and content types. <i>msgen</i> fills a gap where simple <i>echo "..." | mail</i> commands lack the fine-grained control over crucial headers and encoding required for complex or multi-lingual messages.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>msgexec</i> is a utility for inter-process communication (IPC) within the Linux kernel, specifically utilizing System V message queues. It serves a dual purpose: first, to send a message to a pre-existing message queue, and second, to conditionally execute another command. The command accepts a numerical <b>KEY</b> to identify the target message queue, a <b>TYPE</b> and <b>SUBTYPE</b> for categorizing the message, and <b>TEXT</b> as the message content. A unique aspect of <i>msgexec</i> is its ability to execute an optional <b>COMMAND</b> (with its <b>ARGUMENTS</b>) only if the message is successfully sent to the queue. This makes it a useful tool for signaling between processes or for orchestrating tasks where a process should proceed only after successfully communicating a specific event or data via a message queue.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Permissions</b>: The user executing <i>msgexec</i> must have write permissions to the specified System V message queue.<br><br><b>Queue Existence</b>: The message queue identified by <b>KEY</b> must already exist. If it does not, <i>msgexec</i> will fail.<br><br><b>System V IPC Limits</b>: Operations may be subject to system-wide limits on message queue size, total message bytes, and the number of queues. Failures can occur if these limits are exceeded.<br><br><b>Error Handling</b>: The optional <b>COMMAND</b> is only executed if the message is successfully sent. If an error occurs during message sending (e.g., queue full, invalid key, permission denied), <i>msgexec</i> will exit with a non-zero status, and the <b>COMMAND</b> will not be run.


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
<i>msgexec</i> exits with status <b>0</b> upon successful message sending and, if provided, successful execution of the <b>COMMAND</b>. A non-zero exit status indicates an error during message sending or if the <b>COMMAND</b> itself failed to execute (if it was launched).


title: MESSAGE FORMAT
content:
The message sent by <i>msgexec</i> consists of four parts: a numerical <b>KEY</b> for the queue identifier, a numerical <b>TYPE</b> and <b>SUBTYPE</b> for categorizing the message, and a <b>TEXT</b> string as the actual message payload. This structured format allows receiving processes to filter and interpret messages based on these fields.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>msgexec</i> is part of the <b>util-linux</b> project, a collection of essential Linux utilities. It has been a long-standing component for managing and interacting with System V IPC facilities. Its design reflects a straightforward approach to sending structured messages and conditionally executing subsequent commands, fitting into the traditional Unix philosophy of small, specialized tools.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optional. Suppresses verbose output or status messages from the filter. Its availability depends on the specific implementation of <i>msgfilter</i>.<br><br><b><i>command</i> [<i>argument</i> ...]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The program to execute after the message has been filtered. The filtered message is typically passed to this <i>command</i> via its standard input. If no <i>command</i> is specified, the filtered message is usually written to <i>msgfilter</i>'s standard output.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>msgfilter</i> command is not a universally standardized Linux utility. Instead, it typically refers to a program or script designed to intercept and process email messages within a Mail Transfer Agent (MTA) system, such as Qmail or Postfix. A prominent example is <i>qmail-msgfilter</i>, an utility often used in Qmail installations.<br><br>Its primary function is to read a complete email message from standard input, apply various filtering rules (e.g., spam detection, virus scanning, content modification), and then either pass the (potentially modified) message to another program for further processing (like queueing for delivery), or discard it, or reject it with an error. The actual filtering logic is often implemented by external scripts or internal code within the <i>msgfilter</i> program itself, making it a flexible entry point for custom mail processing workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The functionality and exact options of <i>msgfilter</i> vary significantly as it is often a custom script or an application-specific utility rather than a standard system command. Its use is typically confined to specific mail server setups (e.g., Qmail). Misconfiguration can lead to mail delivery issues or security vulnerabilities.


title: INTEGRATION WITH MTAS
content:
In MTAs like Qmail, <i>msgfilter</i> is typically invoked by the daemon responsible for receiving mail (e.g., <i>qmail-smtpd</i>) to process messages before they are handed off to the internal mail queueing system (<i>qmail-queue</i>). This allows for real-time filtering of incoming email.


title: CUSTOM LOGIC
content:
The core strength of a <i>msgfilter</i> utility lies in its extensibility. Users or administrators can implement custom filtering logic using scripting languages (e.g., Perl, Python, Shell scripts) or compiled programs, allowing for diverse applications such as spam blocking, virus scanning, content archiving, or header modification.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of message filtering programs like <i>msgfilter</i> gained prominence with the rise of MTAs requiring customizable message processing capabilities. <i>qmail-msgfilter</i>, for instance, has been a part of the Qmail distribution since its early versions, serving as a template for users to implement their own filtering logic.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>msgfmt</b> [<I>OPTION</I>]... [<I>FILE</I>]...<br><b>msgfmt</b> <I>-o OUTPUT_FILE</I> [<I>OPTION</I>]... [<I>FILE</I>]...


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-o, --output-file=<I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the name of the output MO file. If not specified, output goes to standard output.<br><br><b>-c, --check-format</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform format string checks. Ensures <i>printf</i>-like format strings match between original and translated messages.<br><br><b>-C, --check-header</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Check the PO file header entry for common errors or missing information.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print more detailed information about the compilation process, including progress and statistics.<br><br><b>--statistics</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print statistics about the processed PO file, such as the number of translated, untranslated, and fuzzy entries.<br><br><b>-D, --directory=<I>DIRECTORY</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add <I>DIRECTORY</I> to the list of directories where input files are searched for.<br><br><b>-l, --locale=<I>LOCALE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the locale name. Useful for validating plural forms specific to a locale.<br><br><b>-f, --force-po</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force output of the MO file even if some fatal errors are encountered during compilation.<br><br><b>--strict</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable stricter checks, which might report more warnings or errors.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>msgfmt</i> is a crucial command-line utility within the GNU Gettext framework, which is the standard system for internationalization and localization on Unix-like operating systems. Its primary function is to compile human-readable <b>PO (Portable Object)</b> files into compact, machine-optimized <b>MO (Machine Object)</b> binary files.<br><br>Translators typically work with PO files, which contain original strings (<i>msgid</i>) and their corresponding translations (<i>msgstr</i>). Before an application can use these translations, they must be converted into the MO format, which is efficient for runtime lookups by the Gettext library.<br><br><i>msgfmt</i> performs this compilation, checking for syntax errors, format string mismatches, and other potential issues within the PO files. It ensures that the generated MO file is valid and ready for use by software applications, enabling them to display messages in the user's preferred language.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Incorrect syntax or malformed entries in PO files can lead to compilation failures unless `--force-po` is used.<br>Plural forms are locale-specific; incorrect plural equations or missing plural translations in the PO file for a given locale can cause runtime issues or incorrect display.<br>Ensure the output directory has appropriate write permissions for <i>msgfmt</i> to create the MO file.


title: BASIC USAGE EXAMPLE
content:
To compile a single PO file named <i>en_US.po</i> into an MO file named <i>en_US.mo</i>:<br><code>msgfmt -o en_US.mo en_US.po</code><br><br>To compile multiple PO files into one MO file with statistics:<br><code>msgfmt --statistics -o translations.mo file1.po file2.po</code>


title: ERROR HANDLING
content:
<i>msgfmt</i> provides detailed error messages and warnings to help translators and developers identify issues in PO files. Common errors include unmatched format specifiers (e.g., %s in <i>msgid</i> but not in <i>msgstr</i>), syntax errors, or missing header information. By default, fatal errors will prevent the MO file from being generated, ensuring only valid translations are deployed.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>msgfmt</i> is an integral part of the <b>GNU Gettext</b> internationalization framework, which was first released in 1995. Developed primarily by Ulrich Drepper, it quickly became the de-facto standard for software internationalization on Linux and other Unix-like systems. <i>msgfmt</i>'s role has remained consistent: to efficiently convert human-readable translations into a format usable by applications. Its development has mirrored the evolution of the Gettext project itself, with ongoing improvements to error checking, performance, and support for various localization complexities, such as plural forms and message contexts.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><B><code>-e PATTERN</code></B> or <B><code>--regexp=PATTERN</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the regular expression <I>PATTERN</I> to search for. Can be used multiple times to specify multiple patterns.<br><br><b><B><code>-f FILE</code></B> or <B><code>--file=FILE</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads patterns from <I>FILE</I>, one per line, and treats each line as a separate pattern.<br><br><b><B><code>-i</code></B> or <B><code>--ignore-case</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ignores case distinctions when matching <I>PATTERN</I>.<br><br><b><B><code>-v</code></B> or <B><code>--invert-match</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects messages that <I>do not</I> match the specified <I>PATTERN</I>.<br><br><b><B><code>--msgid</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches exclusively within the 'msgid' (original message ID) field of PO entries.<br><br><b><B><code>--msgstr</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches exclusively within the 'msgstr' (translated string) field of PO entries.<br><br><b><B><code>--msgctxt</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches exclusively within the 'msgctxt' (message context) field of PO entries.<br><br><b><B><code>--location</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches within the source code location comments (e.g., '#: src/file.c:123') associated with each message.<br><br><b><B><code>--comment</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches within translator comments (e.g., '#. comment') of PO entries.<br><br><b><B><code>--files-with-matches</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints only the names of files that contain at least one matching message, one per line.<br><br><b><B><code>--add-location</code></B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds file and line number comments to the output for each matching entry, useful for debugging.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
msggrep is a specialized command-line utility within the GNU Gettext toolset, designed for searching for strings within <I>Portable Object (PO)</I> files. Unlike the general-purpose grep command, msggrep understands the structured format of PO files, allowing it to search specific fields such as <B>message IDs (msgid)</B>, <B>translated strings (msgstr)</B>, <B>context (msgctxt)</B>, source code locations, or translator comments.<br><br>This makes it an invaluable tool for translators, developers, and localization engineers to quickly find, review, and manage translatable content, identify untranslated messages, or locate specific phrases across multiple language files. Its output typically presents the matching entries in a readable PO file format.


title: CAVEATS
content:
msggrep is specifically designed for <I>Gettext PO files</I> and will not function correctly on arbitrary text files. Its reliance on the PO file structure means it requires valid input files to operate efficiently. Performance can degrade with extremely large PO files or when searching across thousands of files without specific file exclusions.


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
msggrep exits with a status of <B>0</B> if one or more matches are found, <B>1</B> if no matches are found, and a value greater than <B>1</B> if an error occurs. This behavior is consistent with grep and useful for scripting.


title: REGULAR EXPRESSIONS
content:
msggrep supports <I>GNU grep</I>'s regular expression syntax, allowing for powerful pattern matching. This includes both Basic Regular Expressions (BRE) and Extended Regular Expressions (ERE) by default, providing flexibility for complex searches.


title: HISTORY
content:
msggrep is an integral part of the <I>GNU Gettext</I> project, which was initiated by the Free Software Foundation in the early 1990s to provide a robust framework for internationalization and localization. Its development arose from the need to manage and inspect the content of PO translation files efficiently, mirroring the functionality of grep but tailored for the specific structure of Gettext message catalogs. It has evolved alongside the Gettext system to support new features and improve performance in managing large translation projects.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>msginit</b> [<i>OPTION</i>]... <i>INPUT</i>.<b>pot</b><br><b>msginit</b> [<i>OPTION</i>]... <i>INPUT</i>.<b>po</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-l, --locale=LOCALE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the target locale (e.g., <b>fr</b>, <b>de_DE</b>) for the new PO file.<br><br><b>-i, --input=FILE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read input from <b>FILE</b> instead of the first non-option argument.<br><br><b>-o, --output=FILE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write output to <b>FILE</b> instead of the default <i>LOCALE</i>.<b>po</b>.<br><br><b>-e, --encoding=ENCODING</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output character encoding.<br><br><b>-p, --previous</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use previous <b>msgid</b> for fuzzy matching (relevant when initializing from an existing <b>.po</b>).<br><br><b>-w, --width=NUMBER</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Wrap output messages at <b>NUMBER</b> columns.<br><br><b>--no-translator</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not include <i>Last-Translator</i> and <i>Language-Team</i> fields in the header.<br><br><b>--translator='NAME <EMAIL>'</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the translator's name and email in the header.<br><br><b>-D, --directory=DIRECTORY</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add <b>DIRECTORY</b> to the list for searching input files.<br><br><b>--color[=WHEN]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Control colored output. <b>WHEN</b> can be <b>always</b>, <b>never</b>, or <b>auto</b>.<br><br><b>--no-color</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Equivalent to <b>--color=never</b>.<br><br><b>--style=STYLE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a specific style for colored output.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print verbose messages during execution.<br><br><b>-s, --statistics</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print statistics about the output PO file.<br><br><b>--strict</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable strict checking of PO file syntax.<br><br><b>--warnings=CATEGORY</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable warnings for a specific <b>CATEGORY</b> (e.g., <b>po-file</b>).<br><br><b>--error-limit=NUMBER</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Stop after <b>NUMBER</b> errors are encountered.<br><br><b>--random-seed=NUMBER</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set random seed for reproducible fuzzy hashes.<br><br><b>--id-hash=ALGORITHM</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use specified algorithm (e.g., <b>sha1</b>) for message IDs.<br><br><b>--force-po</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Always overwrite existing PO files without prompting.<br><br><b>--sort-output</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort the output entries in the PO file.<br><br><b>--sort-by-file</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort entries by file location.<br><br><b>--sort-by-msgid</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort entries by message ID (default if sorting).<br><br><b>--sort-by-location</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort entries by location within the source files.<br><br><b>--sort-by-linenum</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort entries by line number within the source files.<br><br><b>--reverse</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverse the order of the sorted output.<br><br><b>-c, --comment-out-fuzzy</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Comment out fuzzy entries in the output.<br><br><b>-U, --no-wrap</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not wrap output messages.<br><br><b>-W, --wrap</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Wrap output messages (default behavior).<br><br><b>--add-location</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add location information to entries (default).<br><br><b>--no-location</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not add location information to entries.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>msginit</i> is a utility from the GNU gettext package, used to initialize a new <b>.po</b> (Portable Object) file for a specific language translation. It typically takes an existing <b>.pot</b> (Portable Object Template) file, which contains all translatable strings extracted from source code, and creates a <b>.po</b> file filled with the original strings, ready for translators to add their target language equivalents.<br><br>The generated <b>.po</b> file includes a standard header with metadata like project name, version, translator's name, email, and the target language's character set. If an existing <b>.po</b> file is provided as input, <i>msginit</i> can initialize a new <b>.po</b> for a different locale based on the structure and comments of the existing one. This command is crucial for starting a translation project, ensuring the correct structure and initial content for localization efforts.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When creating a new PO file, <i>msginit</i> does not update the <b>POT-Creation-Date</b> in the generated PO header. This date will reflect the creation date of the original <b>.pot</b> file.<br><br>Be mindful of the <b>--force-po</b> option, as it will overwrite an existing PO file without prompt, potentially leading to data loss if not used carefully.


title: TYPICAL USAGE
content:
To create a new French translation file (<b>fr.po</b>) from a template (<b>messages.pot</b>):<br><b>msginit --locale=fr --input=messages.pot --output=fr.po</b><br><br>Alternatively, if <b>messages.pot</b> is the first argument:<br><b>msginit -l fr messages.pot</b><br><br>This creates <b>fr.po</b> in the current directory, pre-filled with original strings and ready for French translations.


title: GETTEXT WORKFLOW CONTEXT
content:
<i>msginit</i> fits into the gettext workflow after source code strings have been extracted into a <b>.pot</b> file (using <i>xgettext</i>) and before translations are added by human translators. After translation, the <b>.po</b> files are then compiled into binary <b>.mo</b> files (using <i>msgfmt</i>) which are used by applications at runtime for displaying localized messages.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>msginit</i> is an integral part of the GNU gettext toolset, which was developed in the early 1990s to standardize and streamline the process of internationalizing software. Its inclusion greatly simplified the initial setup of translation projects by automating the creation of PO files from templates, making it a foundational component for enabling multilingual support in countless open-source and proprietary applications.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-o</b>, <b>--output-file</b>=<i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the converted PO output to the specified <i>FILE</i> instead of standard output.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--check</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks the validity of the input file without producing any output file. Useful for validation.<br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--encoding</b>=<i>ENCODING</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the character encoding for the input file, overriding auto-detection.<br><br><b><b>--force-check</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Similar to <b>--check</b>, but continues checking for errors even after the first one is encountered.<br><br><b><b>--textdomain</b>=<i>TEXTDOMAIN</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used in conjunction with <b>--check</b> to specify the text domain for validity checks.<br><br><b><b>--color</b>[=<i>WHEN</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Colorizes diagnostic messages; <i>WHEN</i> can be <i>always</i>, <i>never</i>, or <i>auto</i>.<br><br><b><b>--no-color</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables color output for messages, equivalent to <b>--color=never</b>.<br><br><b><b>--color-always</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces color output for messages, equivalent to <b>--color=always</b>.<br><br><b><b>--color-never</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables color output, equivalent to <b>--color=never</b>.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>msgunfmt</i> is a utility from the GNU Gettext toolset, designed to reverse the action of the <b>msgfmt --unformatted</b> command. While <b>msgfmt</b> compiles a human-readable PO (Portable Object) file into a machine-optimized MO (Machine Object) file, the <b>--unformatted</b> option of <b>msgfmt</b> creates an "unformatted" message file. This unformatted file, typically used for specific internal processing or intermediate steps, is not a standard PO file. <i>msgunfmt</i> takes such an unformatted file as input and converts it back into a standard, editable PO file.<br><br>This is particularly useful in localization workflows where an intermediate unformatted representation might be generated, and there's a need to revert it to a more manageable and human-editable format for further translation or review. It ensures the integrity of the localization process by allowing round-tripping of message data.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>msgunfmt</i> specifically expects an input file that was generated by <b>msgfmt --unformatted</b>. It cannot convert arbitrary binary MO files or other message formats.<br>It assumes the input file adheres to the internal format generated by <b>msgfmt</b>'s unformatted option.<br>Errors in the input format can lead to incorrect output or failures during conversion.


title: WORKFLOW CONTEXT
content:
<i>msgunfmt</i> is typically not used in the primary <b>xgettext -> msginit -> translate -> msgfmt</b> workflow. Instead, it addresses specific scenarios where an unformatted message file (possibly an intermediate representation for specialized tools or archival) needs to be converted back into a human-readable PO file for editing or review. Its niche role makes it a powerful tool for certain advanced or recovery scenarios within the Gettext ecosystem.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>msgunfmt</i> is an integral part of the GNU Gettext utilities, a widely used framework for internationalization and localization (i18n and l10n) in GNU/Linux and other Unix-like systems. Developed as part of the Free Software Foundation's efforts, Gettext provides a standardized way to manage multi-language support in software. <i>msgunfmt</i> was introduced to provide a reverse operation for the less common <b>msgfmt --unformatted</b> output, ensuring a complete set of tools for various localization workflows. Its development has been consistent with the evolution of the broader Gettext project, focusing on robustness and compatibility.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><B>-o</B> <I>FILE</I>, <B>--output-file</B>=<I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write output to the specified file instead of standard output.<br><br><b><B>-s</B>, <B>--sort-output</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort the output by <I>msgid</I> entries, which can make the file easier to review.<br><br><b><B>-u</B>, <B>--unique</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output only unique messages; remove all duplicate occurrences, keeping only one instance of each <I>msgid</I>.<br><br><b><B>-z</B>, <B>--no-location</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not write <I>#: filename:line</I> comment lines (source code references).<br><br><b><B>-N</B>, <B>--add-location</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write <I>#: filename:line</I> comment lines (this is the default behavior).<br><br><b><B>--keep-first</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When consolidating duplicates, keep the comments from the first occurrence found.<br><br><b><B>--keep-last</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When consolidating duplicates, keep the comments from the last occurrence found.<br><br><b><B>-v</B>, <B>--verbose</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increase verbosity, showing progress messages and information about duplicates found.<br><br><b><B>--help</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><B>--version</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>msguniq</I> is a utility from the GNU gettext tools suite. Its primary purpose is to find and unify duplicate message definitions within GNU gettext Portable Object (PO) files. PO files are used in internationalization (i18n) and localization (l10n) to store translatable strings and their translations.<br><br>When multiple source code locations use the same translatable string, <I>xgettext</I> might create multiple entries for the same <I>msgid</I> in a PO file. <I>msguniq</I> processes these files, consolidating identical <I>msgid</I> entries into a single entry, combining their source code location references (comments). This helps in cleaning up PO files, reducing redundancy, and ensuring that translators only need to translate each unique string once, while still maintaining all references to its occurrences in the code. It is often used as part of a localization workflow to prepare PO files for translation or for merging updates.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>msguniq</I> primarily focuses on consolidating <I>msgid</I> entries. It relies on the <I>msgid</I> for uniqueness. If <I>msgid</I> entries are identical but have different <I>msgctxt</I> (message context), they are still treated as distinct by <I>msguniq</I> by default, which is correct behavior for gettext. It does not perform translation or fuzzy matching; its scope is strictly on de-duplication of message IDs within a single PO file.


title: INPUT AND OUTPUT
content:
<I>msguniq</I> reads PO files specified as command-line arguments. If no files are given, it reads from standard input. The processed output is written to standard output by default, unless the <B>--output-file</B> option is used to specify an output file. This allows for piping its output to other gettext utilities or redirecting it to update the original PO file.


title: PURPOSE IN WORKFLOW
content:
In a typical localization workflow, <I>msguniq</I> is often used after <I>xgettext</I> has extracted strings from source code (which might produce duplicates) and before sending the PO file to translators or before merging it with existing translations using <I>msgmerge</I>. By unifying duplicates, it ensures a cleaner, more efficient translation process.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>msguniq</I> is an integral part of the GNU gettext project, which was started in 1990 by Sun Microsystems and later adopted and extended by the GNU Project. Its development has been continuous, providing robust tools for internationalization and localization. <I>msguniq</I> was created to address the common problem of duplicate strings in PO files that can arise from different source code locations referring to the same translatable string, streamlining the translation workflow by ensuring each unique message is handled only once.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-b</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dumps the contents of the <b>boot sector</b> of the filesystem.<br><br><b><b>-l</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the FAT entries in a <b>linear</b> or detailed, long format.<br><br><b><b>-r</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows information pertaining to the <b>root directory</b> structure within the FAT.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides a <b>short</b> or summary display of FAT entries.<br><br><b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays <b>all</b> available entries in the File Allocation Table.<br><br><b><b>-w</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>Caution</i>) If supported by this specific `mshowfat` variant, this option would enable <b>write</b> operations, allowing direct modification of the FAT. Use with extreme care as it can lead to data loss.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `mshowfat` command, part of the `mtools` suite, is a utility designed for in-depth inspection of the File Allocation Table (FAT) on MS-DOS compatible filesystems. It allows users to view the intricate structure of how disk clusters are chained together to form files and directories. This tool is invaluable for low-level filesystem analysis, debugging potential corruption, or simply understanding the underlying disk allocation mechanisms of FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 volumes. It provides a raw or interpreted view of the FAT, which is crucial for data recovery specialists or developers working with legacy systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<code>mshowfat</code> is designed exclusively for MS-DOS FAT filesystems (FAT12, FAT16, FAT32). It typically operates directly on block devices (e.g., <i>/dev/sdb1</i>) or disk image files, often requiring root privileges for direct device access.<br>While traditionally a read-only diagnostic tool, the presence of a <b>-w</b> option (as indicated in the synopsis) implies potential for direct FAT modification. Such operations carry a significant risk of data loss or filesystem corruption if not performed correctly. Always back up critical data before attempting any write operations.


title: DEVICE ARGUMENT
content:
The command requires a mandatory <i>device</i> argument. This specifies the target FAT filesystem, which can be a physical block device like <i>/dev/fd0</i> (floppy disk) or <i>/dev/sdb1</i> (USB drive partition), or a disk image file.


title: HISTORY
content:
<code>mshowfat</code> is an integral part of the <code>mtools</code> software suite, a collection of utilities developed to enable Linux and Unix-like operating systems to interact with MS-DOS formatted disks and disk images without needing to mount them via the kernel. <code>mtools</code> first emerged in the early days of Linux to facilitate file exchange with DOS-based systems, and its development has paralleled the evolution of FAT filesystems.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-a, --account=<I>account</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the account configured in the msmtp configuration file, allowing for easy switching between different email identities.<br><br><b>-C, --config=<I>file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative configuration file to use instead of the default (~/.msmtprc or /etc/msmtprc).<br><br><b>-d, --debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables highly verbose debug output, showing all network traffic and internal operations for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the SMTP conversation between msmtp and the server, providing insight into the communication.<br><br><b>--host=<I>host</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overrides the SMTP server hostname specified in the configuration file for the current command execution.<br><br><b>--port=<I>port</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overrides the SMTP server port. Useful when the server listens on a non-standard port.<br><br><b>--auth=<I>method</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the authentication method to use (e.g., <i>plain</i>, <i>login</i>, <i>cram-md5</i>). Overrides config settings.<br><br><b>--tls</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the use of TLS/SSL for encrypted communication with the SMTP server, even if not configured.<br><br><b>--read-envelope-from</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads the envelope-from address from the mail's <i>From:</i> header, rather than using a configured 'from' address.<br><br><b>-t, --to</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads recipients from the <i>To:</i>, <i>Cc:</i>, and <i>Bcc:</i> headers in the mail content, ignoring command-line recipients.<br><br><b>--file=<I>file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads the email to be sent from the specified file instead of standard input (stdin).<br><br><b>--logfile=<I>file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Appends log messages, including SMTP conversation and errors, to the specified file.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information for msmtp and exits.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with command-line options and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
msmtp is a command-line tool that acts as an SMTP client, designed to send emails from a local machine via an external SMTP server. It reads the email content from standard input or a specified file and forwards it to the configured server. It supports essential features like TLS/SSL encryption, various authentication methods (PLAIN, LOGIN, CRAM-MD5, DIGEST-MD5, GSSAPI), and IPv6.<br><br>Highly configurable through a plain text configuration file, msmtp can manage multiple accounts, making it suitable for users with different email identities or servers. It's often used as an <i>MTA</i> (Mail Transfer Agent) by Mail User Agents (MUAs) such as <i>Mutt</i>, <i>Thunderbird</i>, or <i>Evolution</i> for outgoing mail, offering a simple and secure way to dispatch messages without the overhead of a full-fledged mail server.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Storing passwords directly in the plain text configuration file can be a security risk if the file permissions are not properly secured. It's recommended to use a keyring or a password helper program if sensitive data like passwords are to be used.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE
content:
msmtp uses a text-based configuration file (defaulting to <i>~/.msmtprc</i> or <i>/etc/msmtprc</i>) to define accounts, server details, authentication credentials, and TLS settings. This file can contain multiple accounts, allowing for easy switching between different email identities and servers. Permissions for this file should be set securely (e.g., 0600) to protect sensitive information.


title: MUA INTEGRATION
content:
msmtp is commonly integrated with mail user agents (MUAs) like <i>Mutt</i>, <i>Thunderbird</i>, or <i>Evolution</i> by configuring them to use msmtp as their external <i>sendmail</i> command. This offloads SMTP communication to msmtp, simplifying the MUA's mail sending capabilities and leveraging msmtp's robust authentication and encryption features.


title: HISTORY
content:
msmtp was developed as a lightweight and secure alternative to traditional full-blown <i>MTA</i>s like <i>Sendmail</i> or <i>Postfix</i> for users who primarily need to send mail via an external SMTP server. Its development started in the early 2000s, focusing on simplicity, configuration via a plain text file, and robust support for modern SMTP features like TLS/SSL and various authentication methods, making it ideal for integration with <i>MUA</i>s on desktop systems.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>mssh</i> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] {<i>HOSTS</i> | <i>-f HOSTS_FILE</i>} [--] <i>COMMAND</i> [<i>ARGS...</i>]<br><br><b>Examples:</b><br><i>mssh</i> host1 host2 host3 -- <i>uptime</i><br><i>mssh</i> -f /path/to/hosts.txt -u myuser -- <i>df -h</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>{HOSTS}</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A space-separated list of remote hostnames or IP addresses on which to execute the command.<br><br><b>-f {HOSTS_FILE}</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a file containing a list of remote hostnames or IP addresses, one per line.<br><br><b>-u {USER}</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The username to use for SSH authentication on remote hosts. If not specified, the current local username is often used.<br><br><b>-i {IDENTITY_FILE}</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to an SSH identity (private key) file for authentication.<br><br><b>-p {PORT}</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The SSH port number to connect to on remote hosts. Defaults to 22.<br><br><b>-P {PARALLELISM}</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the maximum number of concurrent SSH connections to establish. This helps manage system load and network bandwidth.<br><br><b>--</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A mandatory separator used to distinguish <i>mssh</i> options from the command and its arguments to be executed on remote hosts.<br><br><b>{COMMAND}</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The command string to be executed on each remote host.<br><br><b>[ARGS...]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optional arguments for the <i>COMMAND</i>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mssh</i>, often an abbreviation for "Multi-SSH", refers to a class of utilities or custom scripts designed to run the same command on multiple remote Linux servers simultaneously via SSH. Unlike a single <i>ssh</i> command, <i>mssh</i> streamlines administrative tasks across a fleet of machines, making it invaluable for system administrators, DevOps engineers, and anyone managing a cluster of servers. It typically works by iterating through a list of hosts, establishing parallel SSH connections, and executing the specified command on each. The output from all hosts is usually collected and presented to the user, though the formatting can vary depending on the specific <i>mssh</i> implementation. Its primary benefits include automation, efficiency, and reducing manual repetitive tasks, especially useful for deployments, patching, configuration management, or health checks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command <i>mssh</i> is not a universally standardized Linux utility. Its implementation and available options can vary significantly. Many users create simple shell scripts or wrappers, while more robust versions might be community-driven projects. Therefore, the specific syntax and features described might differ from a particular <i>mssh</i> script or tool you encounter. Always check the specific documentation or source code if you're using an unfamiliar <i>mssh</i> implementation. Security considerations, such as proper SSH key management and host verification, are crucial when using any multi-host execution tool.


title: TYPICAL USAGE SCENARIOS
content:
<i>mssh</i> is commonly used for:<br><b>System Health Checks:</b> Quickly checking disk space, uptime, or running processes across a server farm.<br><b>Software Deployment:</b> Distributing and installing packages or applications to multiple servers simultaneously.<br><b>Configuration Management:</b> Pushing small configuration changes or restarting services on groups of machines.<br><b>Patching:</b> Applying security patches or updates across a cluster.<br><b>Data Collection:</b> Gathering log files or system metrics from various hosts.


title: OUTPUT HANDLING
content:
Different <i>mssh</i> implementations handle output differently. Some might interleave output from various hosts, while others might prefix each line with the hostname or group output per host. For extensive output or structured data, piping <i>mssh</i>'s output to tools like <i>grep</i>, <i>awk</i>, or custom scripts is often necessary to parse and analyze the results effectively.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept behind <i>mssh</i> emerged from the fundamental need for system administrators to manage multiple servers efficiently. As server infrastructures grew, manually logging into each machine became impractical. Early solutions often involved simple shell loops around the <i>ssh</i> command. Over time, these basic scripts evolved into more sophisticated tools and specialized projects (like <i>pdsh</i> or <i>parallel-ssh</i>) that provide advanced features like parallel execution, robust error handling, and output formatting. While there isn't a single definitive historical lineage for a command specifically named <i>mssh</i>, it represents this ongoing development towards automating multi-host interactions, driven by the increasing scale and complexity of distributed systems.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mssql-cli</b> [<i>-S &lt;server&gt;</i>] [<i>-U &lt;username&gt;</i>] [<i>-P &lt;password&gt;</i>] [<i>-d &lt;database&gt;</i>] [<i>-E</i>] [<i>-I</i>] [<i>-Q &lt;query&gt;</i>] [<i>-i &lt;file&gt;</i>] [<i>--prompt &lt;prompt&gt;</i>] [<i>--less-channel-bindings</i>] [<i>--help</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-S</b> <i>&lt;server&gt;</i>, <b>--server</b> <i>&lt;server&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SQL Server instance to connect to (e.g., hostname or IP address).<br><br><b><b>-U</b> <i>&lt;username&gt;</i>, <b>--username</b> <i>&lt;username&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the username for authentication.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> <i>&lt;password&gt;</i>, <b>--password</b> <i>&lt;password&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the password for authentication. Note: Typing passwords on the command line is insecure; consider environment variables or interactive prompts.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <i>&lt;database&gt;</i>, <b>--database</b> <i>&lt;database&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the initial database to connect to upon login.<br><br><b><b>-E</b>, <b>--integrated</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses Windows Integrated Authentication. On Linux/macOS, this typically implies Kerberos authentication setups.<br><br><b><b>-I</b>, <b>--no-highlight</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables syntax highlighting in the interactive shell.<br><br><b><b>-Q</b> <i>&lt;query&gt;</i>, <b>--query</b> <i>&lt;query&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes the specified SQL query and then exits the client. Useful for scripting single commands.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>--input-file</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes SQL commands from the specified input file. Similar to a batch script.<br><br><b><b>--prompt</b> <i>&lt;prompt&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Customizes the interactive shell's prompt string.<br><br><b><b>--less-channel-bindings</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables channel bindings during the login process, which can be useful in certain authentication scenarios.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the version number of mssql-cli and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `mssqlclient.py` script is the underlying Python engine for `mssql-cli`, a modern, interactive command-line interface designed for Microsoft SQL Server, Azure SQL Database, and Azure Synapse Analytics. It significantly enhances the traditional command-line experience by offering intelligent auto-completion for SQL keywords, database objects (like tables, views, columns, and stored procedures), and context-aware suggestions. Users benefit from immediate feedback through syntax highlighting, making complex queries more readable. Additional features include a persistent command history, support for common key bindings (`vim`/`emacs`), and the ability to execute queries from files or directly from the command line. Developed with cross-platform compatibility in mind, `mssql-cli` provides an efficient and user-friendly way to interact with SQL Server instances from Linux, macOS, and Windows terminals, streamlining database administration and development workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While `mssqlclient.py` is the core script, users typically interact with the `mssql-cli` wrapper command. <br>Connectivity on Linux and macOS requires the installation of appropriate ODBC drivers (e.g., `unixODBC` and `msodbcsql17`), which are not bundled with `mssql-cli` and must be set up separately. <br>Inputting sensitive information like passwords directly on the command line is generally discouraged due to security risks.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
`mssql-cli` (and thus `mssqlclient.py`) is primarily installed via Python's package installer, `pip`. The recommended command is: <b>pip install mssql-cli</b>. Ensure Python 3.7+ is installed. Proper ODBC driver installation is also crucial for successful database connections on non-Windows systems.


title: INTERACTIVE MODE
content:
When `mssql-cli` is run without the <b>-Q</b> or <b>-i</b> options, it enters an interactive shell. In this mode, users can type SQL queries and commands directly, benefiting from real-time auto-completion, syntax highlighting, and command history.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
`mssql-cli` supports a configuration file (often located at `~/.config/mssql-cli/config`) for persistent customization of settings such as prompt string, key bindings, and display options, allowing users to tailor their experience.


title: HISTORY
content:
`mssql-cli` was developed by Microsoft as part of its commitment to open-source tools and cross-platform compatibility for SQL Server. Released initially around 2017-2018, it aimed to provide a modern, user-friendly command-line experience similar to popular tools like `pgcli` (for PostgreSQL) and `mycli` (for MySQL). It quickly gained traction for its enhanced features over the traditional `sqlcmd`, especially for users operating in Linux and macOS environments, leveraging Python and libraries like `prompt_toolkit` for its interactive capabilities.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>device</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the tape device file (e.g., <i>/dev/st0</i>, <i>/dev/nst0</i>). If omitted, <b>mt</b> typically uses the environment variable TAPE or a system default.<br><br><b><I>operation</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The mandatory action to perform on the tape drive.<br><br><b><I>count</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An optional integer argument for operations that can be repeated (e.g., <i>fsf</i>, <i>bsf</i>) to specify the number of times to perform the operation.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information and exits.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br><b>rewind</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Rewinds the tape to the beginning of the tape (BOT).<br><br><b>offline, rewoffl</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Rewinds the tape and takes the drive offline, making it ready for media change.<br><br><b>eject</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ejects the tape from the drive, if supported by the hardware.<br><br><b>fsf <I>count</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Spaces forward <I>count</I> filemarks (tape marks). Use <i>count</i>=1 to skip the current file.<br><br><b>bsf <I>count</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Spaces backward <I>count</I> filemarks. Leaves the tape positioned at the beginning of the file skipped over.<br><br><b>fsr <I>count</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Spaces forward <I>count</I> records (blocks). Useful for navigating within a single file.<br><br><b>bsr <I>count</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Spaces backward <I>count</I> records. Useful for navigating within a single file.<br><br><b>retension</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Winds the tape to the end, then rewinds it, which helps to improve tape tension and reliability, especially for older tapes.<br><br><b>status</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current status of the tape drive, including information like file number, block number, and tape flags.<br><br><b>erase</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Erases the entire tape by writing zeros over its length. This can be a very time-consuming operation.<br><br><b>weof <I>count</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes <I>count</I> end-of-file marks (filemarks) to the tape. A filemark separates files on the tape.<br><br><b>seek <I>block</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Seeks to the specified <I>block</I> number on the tape. Requires hardware support and may not be available on all drives.<br><br><b>tell</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reports the current logical block number on the tape. Useful in conjunction with the <i>seek</i> operation.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mt</b> (magnetic tape) command is a utility used for controlling the operations of magnetic tape drives. It allows users to perform various actions such as rewinding, ejecting, erasing, and spacing the tape. While less common in modern desktop environments, <b>mt</b> remains crucial in enterprise backup systems, archival solutions, and environments relying on physical tape media for large-scale data storage.<br><br>It interacts directly with the tape device file (e.g., <i>/dev/st0</i> or <i>/dev/nst0</i>), providing low-level control over tape positioning, end-of-file markers, and drive status. Its primary use cases involve preparing tapes for backup, verifying tape integrity, and navigating through archived data, making it an indispensable tool for tape library management.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>mt</b> requires direct access to tape hardware, which might involve specific user permissions. Device names (e.g., <i>/dev/st0</i>, <i>/dev/nst0</i>) are crucial; <i>/dev/nstN</i> (no rewind on close) is generally preferred for backup applications to avoid accidental rewinds. Some operations like <i>erase</i> or <i>retension</i> can take a very long time, and errors often indicate hardware issues, incorrect tape insertion, or unsupported operations for the specific drive model.


title: TAPE DEVICES
content:
Tape devices often come in two forms: a 'rewinding' device (e.g., <i>/dev/st0</i>) which automatically rewinds the tape to the beginning when the device is closed, and a 'no-rewind' device (e.g., <i>/dev/nst0</i>) which leaves the tape at its current position upon closing. Using the no-rewind variant is generally preferred for backup software to avoid accidental rewinds between operations or when multiple files are stored sequentially on a single tape.


title: RETURN STATUS
content:
The <b>mt</b> command exits with a status of 0 on success, and a non-zero status on failure. A non-zero exit status usually indicates an error, which could be due to hardware issues, an incorrect device path, an unsupported operation for the specific drive, or permission problems.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>mt</b> has been a standard Unix utility since early versions, reflecting the historical importance of magnetic tapes as primary storage and backup media. Its fundamental functionality has remained largely consistent over decades, adapting to new tape technologies like QIC (Quarter-Inch Cartridge), DAT (Digital Audio Tape), and particularly LTO (Linear Tape-Open), which became dominant in enterprise and archival storage due to their high capacity, reliability, and cost-effectiveness. While hard drives and cloud storage have superseded tapes for many everyday applications, <b>mt</b> continues to be relevant for cold storage, long-term archival, and large-scale data transfer where physical media are still utilized.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-f</b> <i>device</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the tape device to operate on, e.g., <i>/dev/st0</i>. If omitted, the <i>TAPE</i> environment variable or <i>/dev/tape</i> is used.<br><br><b><i>operation</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The action to perform on the tape drive. Common operations include <b>rewind</b>, <b>offline</b>, <b>fsf</b>, <b>bsr</b>, <b>status</b>, etc.<br><br><b><i>count</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An optional integer argument for operations like <b>fsf</b> (forward space file) or <b>bsr</b> (backward space record), specifying how many files/records to skip.<br><br><b><b>rewind</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Rewinds the tape to its beginning.<br><br><b><b>offline</b> or <b>rewoffl</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Rewinds the tape and takes the drive offline, often ejecting the tape.<br><br><b><b>eject</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ejects the tape from the drive.<br><br><b><b>fsf</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forward spaces <i>count</i> file marks.<br><br><b><b>bsf</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Backward spaces <i>count</i> file marks.<br><br><b><b>fsr</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forward spaces <i>count</i> records.<br><br><b><b>bsr</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Backward spaces <i>count</i> records.<br><br><b><b>status</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the status information of the tape drive.<br><br><b><b>retension</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Winds the tape to the end and then rewinds it, improving tension.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mt-gnu</b> command, often a symbolic link to or a specific build of the standard <b>mt</b> (magnetic tape) utility, provides an interface for controlling magnetic tape devices. It allows system administrators and users to perform various low-level operations on tape drives, such as rewinding, ejecting, skipping records or files, and querying the drive's status. This utility is crucial for managing tape backups, archiving data, and interacting directly with tape hardware. Unlike file system commands, <b>mt-gnu</b> operates on the raw tape device, manipulating its position and state. It is a fundamental tool in environments utilizing tape storage for data retention and disaster recovery. The "gnu" suffix typically denotes its origin or adherence to GNU standards, often part of the <b>mt-st</b> package.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <b>mt-gnu</b> requires appropriate permissions on the tape device file (e.g., read/write access). Incorrect usage, especially with operations like <b>fsf</b> or <b>bsr</b>, can lead to data loss or inability to locate desired data on the tape. Always ensure the correct device file is specified. Be aware of rewinding (<i>/dev/st0</i>) vs. non-rewinding (<i>/dev/nst0</i>) device paths. Physical tape must be loaded for operations.


title: <I>NON-REWINDING DEVICES</I>
content:
For operations that should not rewind the tape automatically after each command, use the non-rewinding device node, typically named <i>/dev/nstX</i> (e.g., <i>/dev/nst0</i>). This is crucial for multi-file archives where you want to read subsequent files without repositioning the tape.


title: <I>PERMISSIONS AND DEVICE FILES</I>
content:
Tape devices are typically located in <i>/dev/</i> (e.g., <i>/dev/st0</i> for the first SCSI tape drive). Users performing <b>mt-gnu</b> operations must have read and write permissions on these device files, usually achieved by being part of the 'tape' or 'disk' group, or by using <b>sudo</b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>mt</b> utility has been a standard component of Unix-like operating systems for controlling magnetic tape drives since their early days. The <b>mt-gnu</b> variant specifically refers to the version provided by the GNU project, often distributed as part of the <b>mt-st</b> (Magnetic Tape SCSI Tape) tools. This package provides enhanced features and better compatibility across various Linux distributions, ensuring robust control over SCSI and other modern tape drives. Its development follows the general evolution of GNU core utilities, focusing on reliability and adherence to open standards.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>mtools-command</i> [<i>options</i>] [<i>arguments</i>]<br><br>Examples:<br><b>mdir</b> <i>a:</i><br><b>mcopy</b> <i>file.txt a:</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>-v</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output, showing more details about operations.<br><br><b><i>-V</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the version information for the <i>mtools</i> suite.<br><br><b><i>-D</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable debugging output for detailed diagnostic information.<br><br><b><i>-s</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a short command line (often implies a default action).<br><br><b><i>-S</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a long command line (often implies a specific action).<br><br><b><i>-q</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate quietly, suppressing most output messages.<br><br><b><i>-b</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Batch mode, preventing prompts for user input.<br><br><b><i>-a</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ask for confirmation before performing certain actions, like overwriting files.<br><br><b><i>[utility-specific options]</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Each <i>mtools</i> utility (e.g., <b>mcopy</b>, <b>mdir</b>) has its own specific options that control its behavior, such as file attributes, recursion, or force overwrites. Refer to individual utility man pages for details.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mtools</i> is a collection of utilities that allow Unix and Linux systems to read, write, and manipulate files and directories on MS-DOS formatted disks (like floppy disks, USB sticks, or disk images) without needing to mount the filesystem. This is particularly useful for handling old DOS-era media or for quick access to FAT-formatted partitions without administrative privileges required for mounting. The suite includes commands like <b>mdir</b> (list directories), <b>mcopy</b> (copy files), <b>mdel</b> (delete files), <b>mmove</b> (move/rename files), <b>mformat</b> (format disks), and many others. It provides a convenient way to interact with FAT file systems directly from the command line, mimicking common DOS commands.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>mtools</i> operates at a lower level than standard filesystem utilities, directly interacting with FAT structures. It does not perform full filesystem consistency checks by default, which can potentially lead to data corruption if the disk is not healthy or if operations are interrupted. It relies on a configuration file (<i>~/.mtools.conf</i> or <i>/etc/mtools.conf</i>) to define drive mappings (e.g., 'a:', 'b:') and other settings. Permissions on the underlying device file (e.g., <i>/dev/fd0</i>, <i>/dev/sdb1</i>) are crucial; the user must have read/write access to the device.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
<i>mtools</i> commands rely on a configuration file, typically <i>/etc/mtools.conf</i> or <i>~/.mtools.conf</i>, to define drive letters (e.g., <i>a:</i>, <i>b:</i>) and their corresponding physical devices or partition images. This file also allows setting default options and behaviors for the utilities. Without proper configuration, <i>mtools</i> might not be able to locate the target MS-DOS filesystem.


title: DEVICE ACCESS
content:
For <i>mtools</i> to function, the user running the command must have appropriate read and write permissions to the underlying block device (e.g., <i>/dev/sdb1</i> for a USB drive partition). This often means the user must be part of a group like 'disk' or 'floppy', or the device permissions must be relaxed, which can be a security consideration.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>mtools</i> suite originated in the early days of Linux and Unix, serving as a critical bridge between these operating systems and the prevalent MS-DOS world. Developed by Alain Knaff, its primary purpose was to facilitate easy file exchange with DOS-formatted floppy disks without the complexities of mounting. While its use for floppy disks has diminished, it remains valuable for interacting with FAT32-formatted USB drives, SD cards, and disk images, especially in scenarios where traditional mounting is inconvenient or restricted.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Verbose output</i>. Provides more detailed information about the tests being performed and their results, including internal checks.<br><br><b><b>-i</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Interactive mode</i>. Pauses after each major test step, prompting the user to press Enter to continue. Useful for debugging and stepping through the tests.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mtoolstest</i> tests the configuration of the <i>mtools</i> utilities. It checks various aspects, such as the accessibility of floppy drives, partitions, and image files defined in the <i>mtools</i> configuration file (typically <i>/etc/mtools.conf</i> or <i>~/.mtools</i>). It also verifies the presence of necessary helper programs like <i>mformat</i> and <i>mdel</i>, and the <i>mtools</i> utilities' ability to recognize and interact with different filesystem types (like FAT12, FAT16, FAT32). This command helps users diagnose problems when <i>mtools</i> commands are not working as expected, providing detailed output about what succeeded and what failed during the tests.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li>Requires the <i>mtools</i> package to be installed.</li><br><li>Relies heavily on the <i>mtools.conf</i> file for configuration; incorrect configuration can lead to test failures.</li><br><li>Some tests might require physical access to floppy drives or specific partition setups, which may not be available on all systems or virtual environments.</li><br><li>May report false positives if the underlying device isn't truly accessible for writing, even if the test passes (e.g., due to complex permission issues not fully simulated).</li></ul>


title: PURPOSE OF THE TESTS
content:
<i>mtoolstest</i> primarily checks the following aspects:<br>1. <i>Configuration file parsing</i>: Verifies <i>mtools.conf</i> syntax and directives.<br>2. <i>Device accessibility</i>: Ensures floppy drives, disk images, or partitions are accessible.<br>3. <i>Helper program availability</i>: Confirms essential programs like <i>mformat</i> are found.<br>4. <i>Filesystem interaction</i>: Tries to create, read, and delete files on configured devices.<br>5. <i>Permissions</i>: Checks if <i>mtools</i> can perform necessary operations based on user permissions.


title: TYPICAL USAGE
content:
Users typically run <i>mtoolstest</i> when <i>mtools</i> commands like <i>mcopy</i> or <i>mformat</i> fail unexpectedly. The output of <i>mtoolstest</i> helps identify misconfigured devices, missing binaries, or permission issues, guiding the user towards a solution for their <i>mtools</i> setup problems.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>mtools</i> package, including <i>mtoolstest</i>, has a long history, originating in the early days of Linux to provide seamless access to MS-DOS filesystems. It evolved significantly with various DOS/Windows FAT filesystem versions (FAT12, FAT16, FAT32) and different media types (floppies, hard disk partitions, disk images). <i>mtoolstest</i> was developed as a crucial diagnostic tool to ensure correct setup and operation across diverse system configurations and hardware.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-r, --report</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays output in report mode (non-interactive), suitable for scripting or logging.<br><br><b>-c, --report-cycles</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Number of pings (cycles) to send in report mode before exiting.<br><br><b>-n, --no-dns</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays numeric IP addresses instead of resolving hostnames.<br><br><b>-z, --as-lookup</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays autonomous system (AS) numbers for each hop.<br><br><b>-i, --interval</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Interval in seconds between sending ICMP ECHO requests. Default is 1 second.<br><br><b>-s, --psize</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the packet size in bytes.<br><br><b>-a, --address</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Binds outgoing packets to a specified IP address (useful on multi-homed systems).<br><br><b>-T, --tcp</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses TCP SYN packets instead of ICMP ECHO for probes (requires root).<br><br><b>-U, --udp</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses UDP DGRAM packets instead of ICMP ECHO for probes (requires root).<br><br><b>-P, --port</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the destination port for TCP or UDP probes.<br><br><b>-L, --lsr</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables Loose Source Record Route (LSRR) option in IP header.<br><br><b>-F, --filename</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads a list of hostnames from a specified file, one per line.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information and exits.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<br><b>mtr</b> (My Traceroute) is a powerful network diagnostic tool that ingeniously combines the functionalities of the <b>ping</b> and <b>traceroute</b> commands into a single, continuously updating display. Unlike <b>traceroute</b>, which shows a single path measurement, or <b>ping</b>, which only measures end-to-end latency, <b>mtr</b> continuously sends packets to a specified destination host. As these packets traverse the network, <b>mtr</b> gathers crucial information about the network path, including every router (hop) along the way, the round-trip time to each hop, and the percentage of packet loss experienced at each individual hop.<br><br>This continuous monitoring allows users to observe network performance in real-time, making it invaluable for identifying and diagnosing various network problems such as bottlenecks, overloaded links, router failures, and packet loss occurring at specific points in the network path. Its interactive interface updates statistics dynamically, providing a live snapshot of network health, while its report mode offers a concise summary for analysis or sharing. By providing a clear, hop-by-hop breakdown of network performance, <b>mtr</b> significantly aids in pinpointing the exact location of network issues, making troubleshooting much more efficient.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>Root Privileges:</b> Some advanced features, such as using TCP (-T) or UDP (-U) probes, or binding to specific source addresses (-a), may require root privileges.</li><li><b>Firewall Blocking:</b> Network devices (routers, firewalls) may block or rate-limit ICMP, TCP, or UDP packets, leading to "<i>???</i>" or "<i>no response</i>" in the output, which can obscure the true network path or performance. This doesn't necessarily indicate a problem, but rather a configuration on the device.</li><li><b>Asymmetric Routing:</b> Network paths can be asymmetric, meaning the forward path (outbound) and return path (inbound) may differ. <b>mtr</b> only shows the outbound path.</li><li><b>Load Balancing:</b> Intermediate routers might employ load balancing, causing subsequent packets to take different paths. This can lead to varying statistics for a single hop.</li></ul>


title: INTERPRETING OUTPUT
content:
The <b>mtr</b> output typically includes columns like <i>Host</i>, <i>Loss%</i> (packet loss percentage), <i>Snt</i> (number of packets sent), <i>Recv</i> (number of packets received), <i>Last</i> (last round-trip time), <i>Avg</i> (average RTT), <i>Best</i> (shortest RTT), <i>Wrst</i> (longest RTT), and <i>StDev</i> (standard deviation of RTT). High <i>Loss%</i> or <i>StDev</i> at a particular hop often indicates congestion or issues at that network segment.


title: INTERACTIVE MODE
content:
In interactive mode, <b>mtr</b> updates statistics in real-time. Pressing 'h' shows help, 'd' toggles display modes, 'p' pauses, and 'q' quits. This dynamic view is crucial for monitoring transient network problems.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>mtr</b> was originally written by Matt Kimball in the late 1990s as a combination of <b>ping</b> and <b>traceroute</b> functionalities. It quickly gained popularity for its interactive and continuous monitoring capabilities, which offered a significant improvement over the static output of traditional tracing tools. Over the years, it has been maintained and enhanced by various contributors within the open-source community, adding features like AS number lookups, different probe types (TCP/UDP), and report generation options, solidifying its status as a standard utility for network diagnostics on Unix-like operating systems.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>mtvfile</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the input MTV ray tracer image file. If omitted, <b>mtvtoppm</b> reads from standard input.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>mtvtoppm</b> is a specialized utility within the Netpbm image manipulation suite. Its primary function is to convert image files generated by the MTV ray tracer into the Portable Pixmap (PPM) format.<br><br>The PPM format is a simple, widely supported image format that can represent full-color images, making <b>mtvtoppm</b> a bridge between the older, proprietary MTV format and more common image processing workflows. It reads the MTV file either from a specified file path or from standard input if no file is provided, and always writes the resulting PPM image to standard output. This allows for piping its output to other Netpbm tools or other image processing applications.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The MTV ray tracer format is relatively obscure and historical; this command's direct utility is limited to those working with legacy MTV image data. It does not support any command-line options for output customization or error handling beyond standard I/O redirection.


title: STANDARD I/O BEHAVIOR
content:
<b>mtvtoppm</b> follows the traditional Unix philosophy of operating on standard input and standard output. If <I>mtvfile</I> is not specified, it reads the MTV image data from standard input. The converted PPM image is always written to standard output. This design facilitates piping, allowing the output of one command to become the input of another. For example, an MTV file could be converted to GIF format by piping its content to <b>mtvtoppm</b>, and then piping that output to <b>ppmtogif</b>, redirecting the final result to an image file.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>mtvtoppm</b> is a component of the Netpbm project, a long-standing open-source toolkit for converting and manipulating graphics files. The Netpbm suite originated from Jef Poskanzer's Pbmplus utilities in the late 1980s, which aimed to provide a common set of tools for various image formats.<br><br><b>mtvtoppm</b> specifically caters to the MTV ray tracer, a program popular in the early 1990s for generating photorealistic images. Its inclusion in Netpbm ensured that images produced by MTV could be integrated into other image processing pipelines and converted to more ubiquitous formats.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the file in text mode, performing default CR/LF conversion. This is generally the default behavior.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses error messages, allowing the command to continue even if a file is not found or inaccessible.<br><br><b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An alias for the -t option, ensuring the file is treated as an ASCII text file.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Raw mode. Displays the file exactly as it is, without any CR/LF conversion.<br><br><b>-x</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;EBCDIC conversion mode. Converts EBCDIC characters in the file to ASCII before displaying.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Hexadecimal dump mode. Displays the file content as a hexadecimal and ASCII dump, useful for inspecting binary files.<br><br><b>-M</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces <i>mtype</i> to use the <i>mtools</i> default drive, often A: or B:, as specified in the <i>mtools</i> configuration.<br><br><b>-D</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug mode, printing verbose information about the command's execution, useful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>-V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of the <i>mtools</i> package to which <i>mtype</i> belongs.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mtype</i> is a command-line utility from the <i>mtools</i> suite, designed to display the contents of files located on MS-DOS filesystems. It functions similarly to the Unix <i>cat</i> command, but is specifically tailored to interact with FAT (File Allocation Table) based media, such as floppy disks, USB drives formatted with FAT, or disk images containing DOS partitions.<br><br>A key feature of <i>mtype</i> is its ability to handle DOS-specific attributes and filename conventions, including the 8.3 filename format. By default, it performs line-ending conversion, transforming DOS-style <i>CR/LF</i> (carriage return/line feed) sequences into Unix-style <i>LF</i> (line feed) sequences, making the output readable on standard Unix terminals. This behavior can be altered using various options.<br><br><i>mtype</i> is particularly useful for examining configuration files, READMEs, or data files on legacy media without needing to mount the entire DOS filesystem, providing a quick and direct way to peek into the contents of these files. Its reliance on the <i>mtools</i> configuration allows it to seamlessly map DOS drive letters to Linux devices.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>mtype</i> relies heavily on the <i>mtools</i> configuration file (e.g., /etc/mtools.conf or ~/.mtools) for drive mappings and other settings. Incorrect or missing configuration can prevent it from locating or accessing MS-DOS filesystems.<br><br>It is primarily designed for FAT filesystems and may not fully support more modern filesystem types like NTFS, HFS+, or ext4.<br><br>Performance can be slower for very large files compared to native <i>cat</i> on mounted filesystems, especially if the underlying media is slow.


title: CONFIGURATION IMPACT
content:
<i>mtype</i>'s functionality is deeply tied to the <i>mtools</i> configuration. Users should consult the <i>mtools.conf</i> man page to understand how drive letters are mapped to physical devices and how default behaviors are set, as this directly affects <i>mtype</i>'s ability to find and process files.


title: WILDCARD SUPPORT
content:
Like other <i>mtools</i> commands, <i>mtype</i> supports DOS-style wildcards (* and ?) when specifying filenames, allowing for pattern-based file selection.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>mtools</i> package, which includes <i>mtype</i>, emerged in the early days of Linux and Unix systems when interoperability with MS-DOS was a frequent requirement, especially for exchanging data via floppy disks. The project was conceived to provide a set of simple, command-line utilities that could read, write, and manipulate files on FAT filesystems without needing to mount them. This allowed users to quickly access DOS media without full filesystem integration, addressing a significant need for cross-platform data transfer. While its primary use case has evolved with the decline of physical DOS media, <i>mtools</i> continues to be maintained for working with legacy systems, embedded devices, or virtual disk images containing FAT partitions.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
mu [GENERAL_OPTIONS] <SUBCOMMAND> [SUBCOMMAND_OPTIONS] [ARGUMENTS]<br><br><I>Common Subcommands:</I><br>mu index [OPTIONS]<br>mu find [OPTIONS] [QUERY_TERMS]<br>mu view [OPTIONS] [MESSAGE_IDS]<br>mu extract [OPTIONS] [MESSAGE_IDS]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--config <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a different configuration file than the default.<br><br><b>-d, --debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show debug messages; useful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show general help message or help for a specific subcommand.<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not output warnings or other information.<br><br><b>--terminate <fd></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used internally for communication with other processes, e.g., to report progress.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
mu is a powerful and versatile command-line utility designed for indexing and searching email messages stored in the <I>Maildir</I> format. It provides a fast, accurate, and easy-to-use search engine for your email collection. Primarily built for integration with email clients like Emacs' <I>mu4e</I> and Vim, mu can also be used directly from the shell for various tasks. It indexes message headers and bodies, allowing for complex queries based on sender, recipient, subject, body content, dates, and more. mu aims to provide a robust solution for managing large email archives efficiently, enabling users to quickly locate specific emails or analyze their mail corpus. Its core strength lies in its speed and its comprehensive indexing capabilities, making it an essential tool for many power users managing their mail locally.


title: CAVEATS
content:
mu is primarily designed for <I>Maildir</I> format mailboxes and may not directly support other formats like <I>mbox</I> without prior conversion. Performance can be significantly affected by disk I/O speed and the size of the Maildir, especially during initial indexing. While powerful, some advanced search functionalities might require familiarity with `mu`'s specific query syntax. It relies on a properly configured Maildir structure and a functional Xapian search engine backend.


title: QUERY SYNTAX
content:
`mu` uses a powerful query syntax that supports Boolean operators (`AND`, `OR`, `NOT`), wildcards (`*`), grouping with parentheses, and field-specific searches (e.g., `from:sender`, `subject:keyword`, `date:today`). This allows for highly precise and flexible searches.


title: INTEGRATION WITH EMACS (<I>MU4E</I>)
content:
One of `mu`'s most popular use cases is its integration with Emacs through the <I>mu4e</I> mail client. <I>mu4e</I> provides a complete, fast, and feature-rich email environment within Emacs, leveraging `mu` for all indexing, searching, and viewing operations.


title: MAILDIR FORMAT
content:
`mu` specifically targets the Maildir format, which stores each email message in a separate file, making it robust against data corruption and easy to manage with standard file system tools. Ensure your mail is stored in this format for `mu` to work effectively.


title: HISTORY
content:
`mu` was created by Dirk-Jan C. B. H. ten Oever as a maildir indexer and search tool, initially released around 2009. It was conceived to provide a fast and reliable way to search large email collections, especially for users who prefer command-line tools or Emacs (leading to the development of <I>mu4e</I>, an Emacs client for `mu`). Its development has been driven by the need for efficient local email management, leveraging the <I>Xapian</I> search engine library for its powerful indexing and querying capabilities. Over the years, `mu` has seen continuous development, adding new subcommands and refining existing functionalities to handle diverse email management tasks.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>'muffin' is not typically invoked as a standalone command-line utility.</i> Its operation is managed by the Cinnamon desktop environment and started as part of the graphical session.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>N/A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>As 'muffin' is primarily a window manager and not a command-line utility for direct user invocation, it does not have standard command-line parameters or options in the traditional sense.</i> Its behavior and configuration are typically managed through desktop settings and configuration files within the Cinnamon environment, rather than via command-line arguments.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The term 'muffin' in the Linux context primarily refers to Muffin, the default window manager for the Cinnamon desktop environment. Muffin is a fork of Mutter, which itself is the default window manager for GNOME. <br><br>As a window manager, Muffin is responsible for drawing window borders, title bars, and handling window-related operations like resizing, moving, minimizing, and maximizing. It also manages desktop effects and compositing, providing the visual framework for applications within the Cinnamon desktop. <br><br><b>It is crucial to understand that 'muffin' is not a standalone command-line utility that users typically invoke directly with options and arguments in the same way as common system commands like `ls` or `grep`.</b> Its functionality is deeply integrated within the Cinnamon desktop environment, managing the graphical display of applications and providing a consistent user experience.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>'muffin' is not a command-line utility in the traditional sense.</b> Users do not typically run `muffin` from a terminal with arguments. Its primary role is as a graphical component of the Cinnamon desktop environment, managing windows and visual effects. Any attempts to run it directly from the command line may yield errors or unexpected behavior, as it expects to be launched within a specific display environment context and is usually managed automatically by the desktop session.


title: USAGE CONTEXT
content:
Unlike most Linux commands, 'muffin' is not designed for direct user interaction via the terminal. Instead, it is an integral part of the Cinnamon desktop session, automatically started and managed by the desktop environment itself. Its 'usage' is experienced through the graphical manipulation of windows and desktop effects within Cinnamon, without the need for manual command execution.


title: CONFIGURATION AND CUSTOMIZATION
content:
While 'muffin' doesn't have command-line parameters, its behavior and appearance can be configured extensively through the Cinnamon desktop's system settings. This typically involves graphical tools for adjusting window themes, animations, desktop effects, and other visual aspects, providing a user-friendly way to customize the window manager without direct command-line intervention.


title: HISTORY
content:
Muffin was developed as the default window manager for the Cinnamon desktop environment. Cinnamon itself began as a fork of GNOME Shell, aiming to provide a more traditional desktop experience. Muffin was forked from Mutter, the window manager used by GNOME Shell, to better suit the specific needs and design philosophy of the Cinnamon project, providing stability and customization options for the desktop's visual presentation and effects.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>muffin-message</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>MESSAGE</i>]<br><b>muffin-message</b> <i>--quote</i> [<i>OPTIONS</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>MESSAGE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The custom message to display. If omitted and <i>--quote</i> is not used, a default placeholder message might be shown.<br><br><b><b>-m</b>, <b>--muffin-art</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes a stylized ASCII art representation of a muffin alongside the message.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>&lt;color&gt;</i>, <b>--color</b> <i>&lt;color&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the display color of the message. Common colors like 'red', 'blue', 'green', 'yellow', 'purple' are supported. Defaults to terminal's foreground color.<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <i>&lt;font&gt;</i>, <b>--font</b> <i>&lt;font&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a special font style to the message using tools like Figlet. Available fonts depend on system configuration.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <i>&lt;seconds&gt;</i>, <b>--delay</b> <i>&lt;seconds&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Introduces a delay in seconds before or during the message display, potentially for animation or dramatic effect.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quote</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Instead of a user-provided message, displays a random, cheerful, or muffin-related quote from an internal database.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the version information of the <b>muffin-message</b> command and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>muffin-message</b> is a playful Linux command-line utility designed to display messages with a touch of whimsy, often accompanied by ASCII art or special formatting reminiscent of a muffin. It allows users to present short, engaging text snippets in a decorative manner. Beyond simple text display, the command offers options to customize the output, such as adding a stylized muffin graphic, applying different colors to the text, or even fetching a random, delightful quote. While not a critical system tool, <b>muffin-message</b> serves as an entertaining addition to a user's terminal experience, perfect for crafting personalized login banners, creative script outputs, or simply sharing a lighthearted thought in a unique way. Its ease of use and charming output make it a fun utility for anyone looking to add a bit of personality to their console.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>muffin-message</b> is primarily a decorative tool and should not be relied upon for critical system outputs or scripting where precise formatting is paramount. Its visual effects, such as colors and ASCII art, are dependent on the capabilities of the terminal emulator being used. Some terminals might not render certain character sets or colors correctly. The random quote database is static and requires manual updates or external configuration to expand.


title: EXAMPLES
content:
Here are some common ways to use the `<b>muffin-message</b>` command:<br><br><b>Display a simple message:</b><br><i>muffin-message "Hello, Muffin World!"</i><br><br><b>Display a message with muffin ASCII art:</b><br><i>muffin-message -m "Baking spirits bright!"</i><br><br><b>Display a colored message:</b><br><i>muffin-message --color blue "Blueberry Muffin Mood"</i><br><br><b>Display a random quote with art:</b><br><i>muffin-message -q -m</i><br><br><b>Display a message with a specific font:</b><br><i>muffin-message -f big "Sweet Treats"</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>muffin-message</b> utility was conceived as a lighthearted, open-source project by a developer passionate about adding fun and personality to the command line. Inspired by classic whimsical Unix tools like <i>cowsay</i> and <i>fortune</i>, its initial development focused on delivering simple, text-based messages with a unique 'muffin' twist. Over time, contributions from the community introduced features like color support, integrated ASCII art, and a curated database of cheerful quotes, solidifying its place as a charming, albeit niche, terminal adornment.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available command-line options.<br><br><br><b><b>--display</b>=<I>DISPLAY</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the X display to use for displaying the theme viewer window. This is useful in multi-display or remote X sessions.<br><br><br><b><b>--theme</b>=<I>PATH</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads a specific Muffin theme from the provided directory <I>PATH</I>. This allows testing themes that are not installed in the system's default theme locations.<br><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>muffin-theme-viewer</b> is a specialized utility within the Cinnamon desktop environment, designed primarily for developers and theme creators. It provides a visual sandbox to preview and test Muffin window manager themes without the need to log out or restart the desktop session.<br><br>When launched, it opens a window displaying various mock windows, titlebars, buttons, and other decorative elements that Muffin themes customize. This allows theme developers to quickly iterate on their designs, observing how different window states (active, inactive, maximized, minimized) and elements appear with the applied theme. It helps ensure consistent visual styling and proper rendering of theme assets.<br><br>It's not intended for general users to manage themes, but rather as a crucial tool in the theme development workflow for the Muffin window manager, which is a core component of Cinnamon.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>muffin-theme-viewer</b> is an application-specific tool for the Cinnamon desktop environment's Muffin window manager.<br>It requires a running X server to function, as it displays a graphical user interface.<br>It is not a general-purpose theme manager; actual theme selection and application for users are handled via Cinnamon's System Settings.<br>Its primary utility is for theme <I>development</I> and <I>debugging</I>, not typical end-user interaction.


title: PURPOSE AND USAGE
content:
The command provides a mock environment for Muffin themes, showcasing various window elements like titlebars, close/minimize/maximize buttons, borders, and different window states (active, inactive, maximized, etc.). This visual feedback is invaluable for theme designers to ensure their themes look consistent and function correctly across various scenarios.<br>


title: DEVELOPER TOOL
content:
Unlike user-facing theme managers, <b>muffin-theme-viewer</b> is a low-level development tool. It does not alter your current system theme, but rather opens a separate window to render the specified or current Muffin theme's window decorations, making it safe for experimentation.<br>


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>muffin-theme-viewer</b> was developed as part of the Cinnamon desktop environment by the Linux Mint team. It emerged alongside the Muffin window manager (a fork of GNOME's Mutter) to provide essential tooling for theme creators. As Cinnamon themes became more sophisticated, a dedicated viewer became necessary to facilitate rapid iteration and testing of window decorations without constant session restarts, streamlining the development process for Muffin themes.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message, providing usage information and a list of available command-line options.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the version information of the <i>muffin-window-demo</i> application and often the associated Muffin window manager.<br><br><b><b>--display=<I>DISPLAY</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the X display to use. This is a common option for X Window System applications when not running on the default display.<br><br><b><b>--screen=<I>SCREEN</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the X screen to use on the given display. Useful in multi-screen X configurations.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>muffin-window-demo</i> command is a specialized utility designed to showcase the visual effects and window management capabilities of the <b>Muffin</b> window manager, which is an integral part of the Cinnamon desktop environment. It typically launches one or more windows and applies various operations like minimizing, maximizing, closing, or resizing, often demonstrating animations, transparency, or other graphical features implemented within Muffin. This tool is not intended for general user interaction or daily system administration, but rather serves as a diagnostic, development, or showcasing aid for developers, testers, or users interested in Muffin's graphical prowess. Its primary function is to provide a quick, repeatable way to observe Muffin's rendering and effect handling.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <i>muffin-window-demo</i> command is highly specific to the <b>Cinnamon</b> desktop environment and its underlying <b>Muffin</b> window manager. It will only function correctly and demonstrate its intended effects within an active Cinnamon session where Muffin is running. It is not a standard Linux utility found on all distributions or desktop environments. Users not running Cinnamon or Muffin will likely find the command unavailable or non-functional. It's primarily a developer tool and not part of the standard user toolkit for daily tasks.


title: PURPOSE AND USAGE
content:
This command serves a niche but important role in the development and maintenance of the Muffin window manager. It provides a consistent and automated way to trigger and observe various window animations and visual behaviors that Muffin is responsible for. For end-users, it offers a glimpse into the underlying mechanisms of their desktop's visual experience, but it's not a tool for customizing or managing windows in a practical sense.


title: AVAILABILITY
content:
<i>muffin-window-demo</i> is typically included as part of the Muffin or Cinnamon development packages (e.g., <I>muffin-common</I> or <I>cinnamon-common</I> on Debian/Ubuntu-based systems). It may not be installed by default on minimal Cinnamon installations or other distributions unless development tools for Cinnamon are explicitly requested.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>Muffin</b>, and by extension <i>muffin-window-demo</i>, traces its lineage back to the <b>Mutter</b> window manager, which is used by GNOME Shell. Mutter itself was a composite window manager built upon the foundations of <b>Metacity</b>, GNOME's previous default window manager. When the Linux Mint team decided to create the <b>Cinnamon</b> desktop environment as an alternative to GNOME Shell, they forked Mutter to create Muffin, adapting it to Cinnamon's specific needs and design philosophy. The <i>muffin-window-demo</i> utility was developed as part of the Muffin project to facilitate the testing, debugging, and showcasing of Muffin's evolving window effects and composite capabilities, becoming an internal tool for the Cinnamon development process.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>account</b> <I>subcommand</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages your Mullvad account settings. Common subcommands include <b>login</b>, <b>logout</b>, <b>get</b> (to display account details), and <b>set auto-login</b>.<br><br><b><b>connect</b> [<I>location</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Establishes a VPN connection. Can specify a location (e.g., country, city, server) or use <b>best</b> to connect to the optimal server. <br>Example: <b>mullvad connect</b> or <b>mullvad connect us ca</b>.<br><br><b><b>disconnect</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Terminates the active VPN connection.<br><br><b><b>status</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current VPN connection status, including connection state, connected server, and external IP address.<br><br><b><b>relay</b> <I>subcommand</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages VPN server (relay) selection. Subcommands include <b>list</b> (to show available servers), <b>set location</b>, <b>set entry location</b>, and <b>set exit location</b>.<br><br><b><b>settings</b> <I>subcommand</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Configures various Mullvad client settings. Use <b>get</b> to view all current settings or <b>set</b> to modify them. <br>Examples: <br><b>mullvad settings set kill-switch on</b><br><b>mullvad settings set dns mullvad</b><br><b>mullvad settings set tunnel-protocol wireguard</b><br><b>mullvad settings set ipv6 on</b><br><b>mullvad settings set lan-access off</b><br><br><b><b>dns</b> <I>subcommand</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages DNS configuration, often through the <b>mullvad settings set dns</b> command. <br><br><b><b>diagnostics</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Collects diagnostic information and logs, useful for troubleshooting or reporting issues to Mullvad support.<br><br><b><b>refresh</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Refreshes the list of available Mullvad VPN relays.<br><br><b><b>version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version of the Mullvad VPN client and daemon.<br><br><b><b>restore-defaults</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Resets all Mullvad client settings to their default values.<br><br><b><b>upgrade</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks for and applies updates to the Mullvad VPN client software.<br><br><b><b>ping</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Pings Mullvad servers to check connectivity and latency.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mullvad</b> command-line interface (CLI) client provides a comprehensive toolset for interacting with the Mullvad VPN daemon on Linux. It allows users to control their VPN connection, manage account settings, select server locations, configure network features like kill switch and DNS, and retrieve connection status. It acts as a primary interface for users who prefer the terminal or want to script Mullvad VPN operations, abstracting the underlying network complexities.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>mullvad</b> command requires the Mullvad VPN daemon to be running in the background. Many commands, especially those altering network settings or connecting/disconnecting, may require elevated privileges, which the client typically handles via <b>pkexec</b> or <b>sudo</b> prompts. Ensure the Mullvad application is correctly installed and its service is active.


title: HISTORY
content:
Mullvad VPN, founded in 2009, has developed its Linux client over time, adapting to changing network technologies and user demands. Initially relying on OpenVPN, the client has significantly evolved to integrate WireGuard as its default and preferred protocol. The current <b>mullvad</b> CLI is part of a unified application that includes a background daemon and a graphical user interface, offering a consistent experience across different platforms while providing robust command-line control for power users and scripting.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show help message and exit. Can be used with global command or specific subcommands (e.g., <b>multipass launch --help</b>).<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output, providing more detailed information about operations.<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress most output, showing only critical errors or results.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the <i>multipass</i> version information and exit.<br><br><b>--timeout <seconds></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a timeout in seconds for a specific command to complete.<br><br><b>--format <format></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output format for commands that display data, such as 'json' or 'yaml'.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>multipass</i> is a command-line utility developed by Canonical that provides a quick and easy way to launch, manage, and interact with Ubuntu virtual machines. It aims to simulate a fresh Ubuntu environment on your local machine, whether it's Linux, macOS, or Windows. <br><br>It handles the entire VM lifecycle from downloading the image, launching the instance, and providing shell access, to stopping and deleting the instances. <i>multipass</i> abstracts away the complexities of underlying hypervisors (like KVM, Hyper-V, or VirtualBox), offering a consistent interface for developers and testers to spin up Ubuntu instances quickly for various tasks, such as testing software, experimenting with new features, or running development environments.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>multipass</i> relies on an underlying hypervisor, which must be installed and properly configured on your system (e.g., KVM on Linux, Hyper-V on Windows, or VirtualBox/QEMU on any supported OS). Performance can vary based on the chosen hypervisor and host system resources. While designed for simplicity, advanced networking configurations can sometimes be challenging. Instances are typically ephemeral, so persistent data should be handled carefully (e.g., via mounts or backups).


title: COMMON COMMANDS
content:
<i>multipass</i> operates using a set of subcommands to manage instances:<br><b>launch</b> <I>[image]</I> <I>[--name <name>] [--cpus <n>] [--mem <n>] [--disk <n>]</I>: Launch a new Ubuntu instance.<br><b>list</b>: List all instances and their states.<br><b>start</b> <I><instance_name></I>: Start a stopped instance.<br><b>stop</b> <I><instance_name></I>: Stop a running instance.<br><b>shell</b> <I><instance_name></I>: Open a shell into an instance.<br><b>exec</b> <I><instance_name> -- <command></I>: Execute a command inside an instance.<br><b>delete</b> <I><instance_name></I>: Delete an instance (moves to trash).<br><b>purge</b>: Permanently delete all instances from trash.<br><b>mount</b> <I><source> <instance_name>[:<target>]</I>: Mount a local directory into an instance.<br><b>transfer</b> <I><source> <instance_name>:<target></I> or <I><instance_name>:<source> <target></I>: Transfer files between host and instance.


title: HYPERVISOR SUPPORT
content:
<i>multipass</i> can utilize various hypervisors depending on the operating system:<br><b>Linux</b>: KVM (via <i>qemu-kvm</i>) is preferred and default.<br><b>macOS</b>: QEMU and VirtualBox are supported.<br><b>Windows</b>: Hyper-V (default) and VirtualBox are supported.<br>Users can explicitly select a driver using the <b>multipass set driver=<driver_name></b> command.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed by Canonical, the company behind Ubuntu, <i>multipass</i> was first introduced to provide a frictionless way for developers to get fresh Ubuntu environments. It gained traction for its simplicity, abstracting away much of the complexity associated with traditional VM management tools. Its development is ongoing, with continuous improvements in hypervisor support, performance, and feature set, aiming to be the go-to tool for quick Ubuntu instance provisioning.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>multitail</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>&lt;file&gt;</i> [...]<br><b>multitail</b> [<i>options</i>] <b>-l</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-f</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Follow file growth; display new lines as they are added to the file(s).<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>&lt;buffer_size&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the scrollback buffer size in lines for each window. Defaults to 100.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Execute a command and tail its standard output, treating it like a log file.<br><br><b><b>-sn</b> <i>&lt;num_screens&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Split the terminal into <i>&lt;num_screens&gt;</i> horizontal windows for viewing files.<br><br><b><b>-e</b> <i>&lt;regex&gt;</i>,<i>&lt;color&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Highlight lines matching the specified regular expression with the given color.<br><br><b><b>-i</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ignore case when searching or matching patterns for highlighting or filtering.<br><br><b><b>-M</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Merge lines from multiple input files into a single chronological stream based on timestamps found in the logs.<br><br><b><b>-r</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverse the order of lines displayed, showing the newest lines at the top (similar to <i>tac</i>).<br><br><b><b>-q</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not exit if one of the input files disappears; continue monitoring others.<br><br><b><b>-j</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Jump to the end of the file(s) immediately upon starting, showing only the latest lines.<br><br><b><b>-w</b> [<i>&lt;width&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Wrap long lines to fit the window width. If <i>&lt;width&gt;</i> is specified, wrap at that column.<br><br><b><b>-cS</b> <i>&lt;scheme_name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a predefined color scheme for syntax highlighting (e.g., <i>apache</i>, <i>syslog</i>, <i>postfix</i>).<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the program's version information and exit.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>multitail</i> is a powerful command-line utility for monitoring log files and command output in real-time. It extends the functionality of the standard <i>tail</i> command by allowing users to view multiple files simultaneously in a single terminal window, similar to a tiling window manager for text. Users can split the screen horizontally or vertically, display files in separate columns or rows, and even merge log files based on timestamps. Beyond simple viewing, <i>multitail</i> offers advanced features such as syntax highlighting for various log formats, filtering lines based on regular expressions, and executing commands to monitor their output. It's an indispensable tool for system administrators, developers, and anyone needing to keep an eye on multiple dynamic text sources concurrently, aiding in debugging, system health checks, and security monitoring. Its customizable interface and robust feature set make it a versatile replacement for running multiple <i>tail -f</i> commands in separate terminal sessions.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Resource-intensive:</b> Monitoring a large number of very active log files, especially with complex regex highlighting, can consume significant CPU and memory.<br><b>Configuration complexity:</b> While powerful, <i>multitail</i>'s extensive options and configuration files can have a learning curve for new users.<br><b>Terminal dependency:</b> Its display capabilities are tied to the terminal emulator, and rendering issues might occur with unusual terminal settings or fonts.


title: FILTERING CAPABILITIES
content:
<i>multitail</i> allows users to filter lines <b>out</b> or <b>in</b> based on regular expressions using options like <b>-E</b> (exclude) and <b>-P</b> (include), enabling focused monitoring of relevant log entries.


title: INTERACTIVE MODE
content:
While primarily used with command-line arguments, <i>multitail</i> supports an interactive mode where users can dynamically change display settings, search, and navigate through buffers using keyboard shortcuts.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
For complex setups or permanent configurations, <i>multitail</i> supports configuration files (e.g., <i>~/.multitailrc</i>) where users can define custom color schemes, filters, and window layouts.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>multitail</i> was created by Paul Slager and first released around 2002. Its development was driven by the need for a more advanced <i>tail</i> utility that could handle multiple log files simultaneously within a single terminal, addressing the inconvenience of opening numerous terminal windows or using complex shell scripts to monitor logs. It has since evolved, incorporating features like coloring, filtering, and merging, making it a staple tool for system administrators and developers.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message detailing available command-line options and exits.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the Mumble client's version information and exits.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>&lt;hostname&gt;</i>[<b>:</b><i>&lt;port&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the server hostname and optionally the port to connect to directly on startup. <br><i>Example: mumble -s myvoicechat.com:64738</i><br><br><b><b>-n</b> <i>&lt;nickname&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the nickname to use when connecting to a server, overriding any saved profile name.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>&lt;password&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the password for the server specified by <b>-s</b> or a Mumble URL.<br><br><b><b>-m</b>, <b>--mute</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the Mumble client with the microphone muted by default.<br><br><b><b>-a</b> <i>&lt;url&gt;</i>, <b>--autocmd</b> <i>&lt;url&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects to a Mumble server using a Mumble URL (e.g., <i>mumble://user:pass@host:port/channel?version=1.2.0</i>). This is a comprehensive way to specify connection details.<br><br><b><b>--no-ssl-certs</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables loading of SSL certificates. Use with caution as it reduces security.<br><br><b><b>--config</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative configuration file to use instead of the default.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `mumble` command refers to the Mumble client application, a popular open-source, low-latency, high-quality voice chat program primarily used by gamers and for collaborative work. It leverages a client-server architecture, allowing users to connect to a central server (Murmur) to communicate with others in various channels. Mumble is known for its excellent audio quality, low latency, and strong encryption. While typically launched via a graphical user interface, the `mumble` command provides a way to start the application from the command line, often with specific connection parameters, enabling automation or quick server joins without navigating the GUI.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The `mumble` command refers specifically to the Mumble VoIP client application, not a general-purpose Linux utility. Its primary interface and configuration are typically graphical. Command-line usage is mostly for automated connections or specific startup parameters. Not all installations may include a symlink to `mumble` directly in the system's PATH, requiring the full path to the executable.


title: MUMBLE URLS
content:
Mumble URLs are a powerful way to encapsulate full connection details including server address, port, username, password, channel, and even certificates. They follow the format <i>mumble://[<I>username</I>[:<I>password</I>]@]<I>hostname</I>[:<I>port</I>]/[<I>channel</I>[/<I>subchannel</I>]*][?<I>query</I>]</i>. They can be used directly as an argument to the `mumble` command or with the <b>-a</b>/<b>--autocmd</b> flag.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
Mumble stores user preferences, server bookmarks, and certificates in configuration files, typically located in <i>~/.config/Mumble/Mumble.conf</i> on Linux systems. While most settings are managed via the GUI, the <b>--config</b> option allows power users to manage multiple distinct Mumble profiles or settings sets for different use cases.


title: HISTORY
content:
Mumble was first released in 2005, created by Thorvald Natvig. It was designed to overcome latency issues and provide superior audio quality compared to existing VoIP solutions of the time. Its open-source nature fostered community contributions and cross-platform development, making it a popular choice for gaming communities and professional teams requiring reliable, secure voice communication. The command-line interface has been a consistent feature, primarily for advanced users and integrations.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-A <i>bits</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the anti-aliasing bits for rendering (e.g., 0, 4, 8).<br><br><b>-C <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Load a specified colorspace profile.<br><br><b>-F <i>name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative font file to use for rendering.<br><br><b>-I <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Invert the colorspace, often used for a 'night mode' effect.<br><br><b>-N <i>res</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the default resolution for rendering documents.<br><br><b>-O <i>string</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide the owner password for encrypted documents.<br><br><b>-S <i>name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Load a stylesheet for EPUB or HTML documents.<br><br><b>-W <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a font substitution file.<br><br><b>-X <i>xres</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the X-axis resolution for rendering.<br><br><b>-Y <i>yres</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the Y-axis resolution for rendering.<br><br><b>-c <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a client certificate file for secure connections.<br><br><b>-f <i>fit</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the initial page fit mode (e.g., 'width', 'height', 'whole').<br><br><b>-i <i>interval</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the slideshow interval in seconds for automatic page advancement.<br><br><b>-l</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all available fonts detected by MuPDF.<br><br><b>-o <i>output</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an output filename, typically for conversion tasks.<br><br><b>-p <i>password</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide the user password for encrypted documents.<br><br><b>-r <i>angle</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Rotate the initial page view by a specified angle (e.g., 90, 180, 270).<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the MuPDF version information and exit.<br><br><b>-z <i>zoom</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the initial zoom level as a percentage (e.g., 100 for 100%).<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress informational messages, running in quiet mode.<br><br><b>-x</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable X11 display, forcing text-mode output or conversion.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
MuPDF is a free and open-source software suite primarily used for viewing and processing various document formats, including <b>PDF</b>, <b>XPS</b>, <b>EPUB</b>, <b>FictionBook</b>, and comic book archives (<b>CBZ</b>, <b>CBR</b>). It is renowned for its lightweight nature, exceptional speed, and strong emphasis on security. Unlike many feature-rich document viewers, MuPDF prioritizes rendering accuracy and performance, making it an excellent choice for systems with limited resources or for users who prefer a minimalist interface. Its rendering engine is also widely used in other applications and libraries due to its robust and efficient design. MuPDF supports advanced features such as searching, text selection, and annotation viewing, although the graphical interface remains intentionally simple. It also includes command-line tools for document conversion and manipulation, extending its utility beyond simple viewing.


title: CAVEATS
content:
MuPDF's minimalist design means some advanced GUI features (like complex annotation tools or extensive toolbar customization) are often handled via keyboard shortcuts rather than explicit menu options. While generally robust, rendering of highly complex or malformed documents might sometimes vary compared to other engines. For very large documents, memory usage can still be significant, especially with high anti-aliasing settings.


title: KEY BINDINGS
content:
MuPDF is heavily reliant on keyboard shortcuts for navigation and interaction. Common bindings include: <b>j</b>/<b>k</b> for next/previous page, <b>+</b>/<b>-</b> for zoom in/out, <b>/</b> for search, <b>q</b> to quit, and <b>r</b> to reload. Users are encouraged to consult the program's manual page (<i>man mupdf</i>) for a complete list of shortcuts.


title: COMMAND-LINE UTILITY
content:
Beyond interactive viewing, MuPDF provides powerful command-line capabilities for document manipulation through companion tools like <b>mutool</b> (often shipped with MuPDF). <b>mutool</b> allows for conversions between formats (e.g., PDF to PNG, PDF to text), document merging, splitting, and encryption/decryption, making it a versatile backend for automated document processing workflows.


title: HISTORY
content:
MuPDF was originally developed by Artifex Software Inc., a company renowned for its Ghostscript interpreter. It was designed from the ground up to be a lightweight, high-performance, and secure alternative for rendering <b>PDF</b> and <b>XPS</b> documents. Its development emphasized a small code footprint and efficient parsing and rendering, aiming to avoid the complexities and security vulnerabilities often associated with larger, more feature-rich document processing libraries. Over time, it has expanded its support to cover various other formats, while steadfastly maintaining its core philosophy of speed and security.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b><pre>musescore [options] [file...]</pre></b><br>The `musescore` command is used to launch the MuseScore application, optionally opening one or more score files or performing headless operations like export.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message with available command-line options and exit.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the MuseScore version number and exit.<br><br><b>-o, --output-file <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Export the specified score to a file in a different format. The format is determined by the file extension (e.g., .pdf, .midi, .mp3, .png, .svg, .mxl). Can be used for headless conversions.<br><br><b>-s, --score-file <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the score file to open. While optional for opening a single file (you can just pass the filename), it can be useful in scripting.<br><br><b>-m, --midi-port <port></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the MIDI port to use for input or output. This is typically a device ID or name.<br><br><b>-p, --playback-tempo <tempo></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the playback tempo for the score in BPM (beats per minute) when opening or exporting.<br><br><b>-r, --range <range></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When exporting, specify a range of measures or pages to include. Examples: 1-5 for measures 1 to 5, p1-p2 for pages 1 to 2.<br><br><b>-d, --debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose debug output to the console, useful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>-F, --factory-settings</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Start MuseScore with factory default settings. This is often used to resolve issues caused by corrupted user settings without affecting existing scores.<br><br><b>-L, --layout-debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable layout debugging features, providing visual cues for layout elements.<br><br><b>-u, --user-settings <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative user settings file to load instead of the default.<br><br><b>--ipc-id <id></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an inter-process communication ID, primarily for scripting and plugin interaction.<br><br><b>--no-midi</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable MIDI input/output entirely.<br><br><b>--no-synthesizer</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable the internal software synthesizer, useful for systems with external hardware or performance issues.<br><br><b>--use-ffmpeg</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force the use of FFmpeg for audio export, if FFmpeg is installed and MuseScore is compiled with support for it.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
MuseScore is a powerful and versatile open-source music notation software. It provides a comprehensive suite of tools for composing, arranging, and engraving musical scores. Users can input notes via keyboard, mouse, or MIDI keyboard, and the software supports a wide range of musical symbols, articulations, dynamics, and text.<br><br>Beyond creation, MuseScore allows for professional-quality score playback using its integrated synthesizer and SoundFont capabilities. It supports importing and exporting various file formats, including MusicXML, MIDI, PDF, PNG, SVG, MP3, and WAV, making it highly interoperable with other music software and publishing workflows. MuseScore is widely used by musicians, composers, educators, and students for creating lead sheets, orchestral scores, parts, and more, offering a free and feature-rich alternative to commercial notation programs.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When using `musescore` for headless conversions with the `-o` option, ensure that the output file extension accurately reflects the desired format. If FFmpeg support is desired for audio export (e.g., MP3), it must be installed on your system and MuseScore must have been compiled with FFmpeg integration. MuseScore's performance can vary depending on the complexity of the score and the system's hardware resources.<br><br>The `-F` option is extremely useful for troubleshooting, as it allows launching the application without loading potentially problematic user configurations.


title: EXPORT FORMATS
content:
MuseScore supports a wide array of export formats, making it highly versatile for different workflows. Common formats include: <i>PDF</i> (for printing and sharing scores), <i>PNG/SVG</i> (for high-quality image exports of scores or excerpts), <i>MIDI</i> (for importing into DAWs or other music software for playback/sequencing), <i>MusicXML</i> (the industry standard for exchanging musical scores between different notation software), and <i>MP3/WAV/FLAC</i> (for audio playback of the score's internal synthesizer sounds).


title: HEADLESS OPERATIONS
content:
The `musescore` command-line interface is particularly powerful for automated tasks, such as converting multiple scores from one format to another without needing to open the graphical user interface. This is achieved using the `-o` (output file) option in conjunction with input files, making it suitable for batch processing and integration into larger scripting workflows.


title: HISTORY
content:
MuseScore was originally created by Werner Schweer and first released in 2008. It quickly gained traction as a free and open-source alternative to commercial music notation software. Over the years, it has seen continuous development, driven by a dedicated community and a core team. Major milestones include the introduction of various playback improvements, significant UI/UX overhauls, and enhanced import/export capabilities, solidifying its position as a leading tool for music composition and engraving.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-o <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Place the output into <i>file</i>. This is the standard GCC option for specifying the output executable name.<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compile or assemble the source files, but do not link. The output will be object files.<br><br><b>-S</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compile only; do not assemble or link. The output will be assembly files.<br><br><b>-E</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Preprocess only; do not compile, assemble or link. The output will be preprocessed source code.<br><br><b>-I <i>dir</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add the directory <i>dir</i> to the list of directories to be searched for header files.<br><br><b>-L <i>dir</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add the directory <i>dir</i> to the list of directories to be searched for libraries. musl-gcc often implicitly uses this to point to musl's library path.<br><br><b>-l <i>library</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Link with the specified <i>library</i>. For example, -lm links with the math library.<br><br><b>-static</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Link against static libraries. While musl encourages static linking, this option explicitly forces it for all available libraries.<br><br><b>-g</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produce debugging information in the operating system's native format (e.g., DWARF).<br><br><b>-O<i>level</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optimize the generated code. <i>level</i> can be 0, 1, 2, 3, s, or fast. Higher levels generally result in faster but larger code.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
musl-gcc is a convenient wrapper script or alias for the <i>GNU Compiler Collection (GCC)</i>, specifically configured to link programs against the <br><i>musl C standard library</i> instead of the more common <i>GNU C Library (glibc)</i>. <br><br>The primary purpose of musl-gcc is to facilitate the creation of highly portable and lightweight executables. Musl is known for its small footprint, simplicity, and emphasis on static linking, which results in standalone binaries with minimal external dependencies. This makes musl-gcc particularly valuable for building applications for embedded systems, creating minimal Docker images, or cross-compiling for targets where glibc might be too large or complex. <br><br>Essentially, musl-gcc automates the process of passing the correct compiler and linker flags to GCC to ensure that the musl library is used for compilation and linking, streamlining the development of musl-based applications.


title: CAVEATS
content:
musl-gcc is typically a component of a specific <i>musl toolchain</i> or a wrapper script found in environments like Alpine Linux. It is not a standalone command universally present on all Linux distributions by default. <br><br>Users may need to install a musl-based toolchain or compile GCC specifically for musl to use it. <br><br>While <i>musl</i> offers many advantages, some <i>glibc-specific</i> features (e.g., complex Name Service Switch (NSS) configurations, dynamic loading of shared libraries through dlopen in specific contexts) might behave differently or be unavailable.


title: STATIC LINKING EMPHASIS
content:
One of the core philosophies behind <i>musl</i> is to facilitate and encourage <i>static linking</i>. When you compile with musl-gcc, the resulting executables are often statically linked by default or with minimal effort (e.g., using the -static flag). This means all necessary library code is bundled directly into the executable, eliminating external library dependencies and greatly improving portability across different Linux systems.


title: TOOLCHAIN INSTALLATION
content:
To use musl-gcc, you typically need a <i>musl-cross-toolchain</i>. This is a GCC compiler suite built specifically to target the <i>musl libc</i>. It can be built from source (e.g., using projects like <i>musl-cross-make</i>) or installed via package managers on distributions that support it (e.g., <i>alpine-sdk</i> on Alpine Linux, or specific cross-compilation packages on other distros).


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>musl C library</i> project, initiated by Rich Felker, aimed to create a lightweight, efficient, and standards-compliant C library. As <i>musl</i> gained traction, particularly for embedded systems and minimalist Linux distributions like Alpine Linux, a clear need emerged for a convenient way to compile programs against it using the ubiquitous GCC compiler. <br><br>musl-gcc emerged as a practical solution, often implemented as a simple shell script or a specially configured GCC binary within a <i>musl</i>-based toolchain. Its development paralleled the growth of <i>musl's</i> adoption, providing a streamlined path for developers to leverage <i>musl's</i> benefits without manually managing complex GCC linker flags.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>mutagen</B> [<I>GLOBAL_OPTIONS</I>] <I>command</I> [<I>command_options</I>] [<I>arguments</I>]<br><br>Common commands:<br><B>mutagen sync create</B> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] <I>source_path</I> <I>destination_url</I><br><B>mutagen sync monitor</B> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] [<I>session_identifier</I>]<br><B>mutagen sync terminate</B> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] [<I>session_identifier</I>]<br><B>mutagen daemon start</B><br><B>mutagen project start</B> [<I>OPTIONS</I>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-m, --mode <mode></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the synchronization mode. Common modes include <B>two-way-resolved</B> (bidirectional with conflict resolution), <B>one-way-replica</B> (source to destination), and <B>one-way-replica-pull</B> (destination to source).<br><br><b>-i, --ignore <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies paths to ignore during synchronization. Can be specified multiple times. Supports patterns similar to <B>.gitignore</B>.<br><br><b>--symlink-mode <mode></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Determines how symlinks are handled. Options include <B>portable</B> (replicate symlinks as-is) or <B>posix-raw</B> (raw byte replication).<br><br><b>--watch-mode <mode></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Configures how filesystem changes are detected. Options like <B>portable</B> (OS-native events) or <B>no-watch</B> (manual scanning required).<br><br><b>--file-mode <octal></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets default permissions for synchronized files, in octal format (e.g., <B>0644</B>).<br><br><b>--dir-mode <octal></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets default permissions for synchronized directories, in octal format (e.g., <B>0755</B>).<br><br><b>--name <name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Assigns a friendly name to the synchronization session for easier identification and management.<br><br><b>--label <label></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a label to the session. Can be used for filtering or grouping sessions, especially with <B>mutagen project</B>.<br><br><b>source_path</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The local path to synchronize from. Can be an absolute or relative path.<br><br><b>destination_url</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The remote URL to synchronize to, typically in the format <B>[user@]host[:port][/path]</B>, or Docker/Kubernetes specific formats.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Mutagen is an advanced command-line tool designed for fast, robust, and cross-platform file synchronization, primarily accelerating remote development workflows. It establishes secure, bidirectional connections to keep files consistent between a local filesystem and a remote environment, such as Docker containers, Kubernetes pods, virtual machines, or remote servers. Unlike traditional tools like <B>rsync</B> or <B>scp</B>, Mutagen operates in <I>real-time</I>, detecting changes instantly and propagating them efficiently. This makes it ideal for software development, where code modifications need immediate reflection in a remote build or execution environment. Mutagen supports various synchronization modes (e.g., <B>two-way-resolved</B>, <B>one-way-replica</B>), includes sophisticated conflict resolution mechanisms, and offers robust error recovery. Its performance is highly optimized for handling a large number of small files and low-latency updates, using SSH for secure transport. It provides extensive configuration options for path ignoring, symlink handling, and watch modes, ensuring flexible and efficient synchronization.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Mutagen relies on a background <B>mutagen daemon</B> process, which must be running for synchronization sessions to operate. Initial synchronization of very large datasets or projects with an extremely high number of files can consume significant time and resources. While optimized, network latency and high rates of concurrent file changes can impact performance. Users should carefully understand synchronization modes and conflict resolution to avoid unexpected data behavior, especially in <B>two-way-resolved</B> mode. Path normalization differences between operating systems (e.g., Windows vs. Linux) can sometimes lead to subtle issues.


title: DAEMON AND SESSION MANAGEMENT
content:
Mutagen operates using a persistent background daemon that manages all synchronization sessions. Commands like <B>mutagen daemon start</B>, <B>mutagen sync list</B>, <B>mutagen sync monitor</B>, and <B>mutagen sync terminate</B> are used to control and observe these sessions. Sessions can also be managed via project configurations.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
For complex setups or project-specific configurations, Mutagen supports configuration files, typically named <B>mutagen.yml</B> or <B>mutagen.toml</B>. These files allow defining multiple synchronization sessions, labels, ignores, and other settings in a version-controllable manner using the <B>mutagen project</B> commands.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed by Mutagen.io, Mutagen emerged as an open-source solution to address the persistent challenges of slow and inefficient file synchronization in modern remote development environments, particularly with technologies like Docker Desktop, WSL, and various cloud-based virtual machines. Its development focused on performance, robustness, and cross-platform compatibility, aiming to provide a seamless 'native' development experience even when code resides remotely. It gained traction within the developer community due to its ability to significantly improve feedback loops and reduce friction in cloud-native and containerized development workflows. The project remains under active development with a focus on stability, performance, and new features.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>convert</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Converts documents between various formats (e.g., PDF to PNG, PDF to EPUB, XPS to PDF). Supports image, text, and document output formats.<br><br><b><i>draw</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Renders document pages to image files (e.g., PNG, JPEG, TIFF) or displays them. Useful for previewing or generating thumbnails.<br><br><b><i>info</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed information about a document, including metadata, structure, and object contents. Useful for debugging and analysis.<br><br><b><i>clean</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Rewrites and sanitizes PDF files, often used to fix corruptions, linearize for web viewing, or optimize file size by garbage collection.<br><br><b><i>extract</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts images, fonts, and other embedded resources from a document. Resources are typically saved as separate files.<br><br><b><i>poster</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Splits large document pages into multiple smaller tiles, facilitating printing of oversized documents on standard paper sizes.<br><br><b><i>merge</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Combines multiple PDF documents into a single output PDF file. (Availability may depend on MuPDF build options.)<br><br><b><i>show</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decompresses and displays the raw content of specified PDF objects, aiding in understanding PDF internal structure.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mutool</b> command is a powerful and efficient command-line utility provided as part of the <I>MuPDF</I> software suite. It acts as a versatile toolkit for manipulating, converting, displaying, and inspecting various document formats, primarily <I>PDF</I> and <I>XPS</I> files. <br><br>Known for its speed and small footprint, <b>mutool</b> leverages MuPDF's rendering engine to perform a wide array of tasks. It supports operations such as converting documents to different formats (images, other document types), extracting embedded resources (images, fonts), displaying document information, cleaning and optimizing PDF files, and even creating new PDF documents from basic inputs. Its functionality is organized into distinct subcommands, making it a comprehensive solution for document processing needs directly from the terminal.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The exact set of supported formats and available subcommands for <b>mutool</b> can vary depending on how the <I>MuPDF</I> library was compiled and packaged by your distribution. Some advanced features, like <I>merge</I>, might not be universally available. Always back up original documents before performing potentially destructive operations like <I>clean</I> or <I>convert</I>.


title: MULTITOOL DESIGN
content:
Unlike many other Linux commands that perform a single specific task, <b>mutool</b> is designed as a 'multitool'. Its core functionality is delivered through various subcommands (e.g., <I>convert</I>, <I>draw</I>, <I>info</I>), each handling a distinct aspect of document processing. Users specify the desired operation via the first argument after <I>mutool</I>.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>mutool</b> is an integral part of the <I>MuPDF</I> project, an open-source, lightweight PDF and XPS viewer and toolkit developed by <I>Artifex Software</I>. It originated as a command-line interface to expose the powerful rendering and document manipulation capabilities of the underlying MuPDF library, known for its speed and compact design. Its development mirrors that of MuPDF itself, continually evolving to support new features and formats while maintaining its performance focus.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b> <i>alias</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds <i>alias</i> to the current list of aliases for sending mail.<br><br><b><b>-b</b> <i>bcc-address</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a blind carbon copy recipient for a new message being composed.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>cc-address</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a carbon copy recipient for a new message being composed.<br><br><b><b>-e</b> <i>command</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes a <i>command</i> after the configuration file (muttrc) has been parsed. Useful for temporary settings.<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <i>mailbox</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Opens the specified <i>mailbox</i> instead of the default incoming mailbox.<br><br><b><b>-H</b> <i>draft</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads message headers from the specified <i>draft</i> file, typically for resuming a postponed message.<br><br><b><b>-n</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents checking for new mail upon startup, opening the current mailbox directly.<br><br><b><b>-P</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the postponed message menu (if any), allowing you to resume composing a draft.<br><br><b><b>-Q</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Queries the recipients in the postponed message menu without displaying the full menu.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>subject</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the subject line for a new message being composed.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the <i>Mutt</i> version number and compile-time options, then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>Mutt</i> is a powerful and highly customizable text-based email client (Mail User Agent - MUA) for Unix-like operating systems. It is renowned for its efficiency, speed, and minimal resource usage, making it an ideal choice for command-line enthusiasts, system administrators, and developers. <br><br>Inspired by earlier clients like <i>elm</i> and <i>pine</i>, <i>Mutt</i> offers an extensive set of features including support for POP3, IMAP, and SMTP protocols (often via external utilities), various mailbox formats (mbox, Maildir, MH), and robust handling of attachments. Its interface is entirely keyboard-driven, providing a steep but rewarding learning curve due to its highly configurable keybindings and powerful command set. Users can tailor almost every aspect of its behavior, from display colors and header formats to complex mail filtering and scoring rules, using a plain-text configuration file, typically <i>~/.muttrc</i>. <br><br><i>Mutt</i> adheres to the Unix philosophy by integrating seamlessly with external tools for tasks such as GPG/PGP encryption, spell-checking, and viewing diverse attachment types, offering unparalleled control and flexibility over email management.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>Mutt</i> has a reputation for a steep learning curve due to its highly configurable nature and keyboard-centric interface. Achieving full functionality often requires integrating with other external tools (e.g., for sending mail via SMTP, GPG/PGP encryption, or viewing HTML email). Its text-only interface may not suit users accustomed to graphical email clients.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
<i>Mutt</i>'s behavior is almost entirely controlled by a plain-text configuration file, most commonly located at <i>~/.muttrc</i> or <i>~/.mutt/muttrc</i>. This file can contain a vast array of commands to customize everything from keybindings and display formats to mail processing rules, offering unparalleled flexibility.


title: EXTENSIBILITY
content:
A core strength of <i>Mutt</i> is its seamless integration with other Unix utilities. It can leverage programs like <i>gpg</i> for encryption/decryption, <i>msmtp</i> or <i>postfix</i> for sending mail, <i>w3m</i> for viewing HTML content, and various image viewers for attachments. This allows users to build a highly personalized and powerful email workflow tailored to their specific needs.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>Mutt</i> was initially released in June 1995 by Michael Elkins, who sought to create a mail client that was smaller, faster, and more customizable than existing options like <i>elm</i> and <i>pine</i>. Its guiding philosophy became encapsulated in the well-known motto: "All mail clients suck. This one just sucks less." For many years, <i>Mutt</i> saw active development and became a staple for command-line users. While <i>Mutt</i> itself continues to be maintained, a fork named <i>neomutt</i> emerged to provide more active development and new features.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
The standalone <b>Jetifier</b> tool is invoked via the Java Virtual Machine: <br> <br> <i>java -jar jetifier-standalone.jar</i> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <<i>INPUT_PATH</i>> <<i>OUTPUT_PATH</i>>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--input</b> <<i>path</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input file or directory to be jetified. This can be an Android Archive (AAR), Java Archive (JAR), or a directory containing multiple such artifacts.<br><br><b><b>--output</b> <<i>path</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the output location where the jetified artifacts will be saved. This must be a different path from the input to prevent overwriting.<br><br><b><b>--config</b> <<i>path</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides a path to an optional custom configuration file (e.g., `jetifier-config.txt`). This allows users to define or override specific mapping rules for transformations.<br><br><b><b>--strip-signatures</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes existing JAR signatures from signed artifacts during the jetification process. This is often necessary because bytecode modification invalidates digital signatures.<br><br><b><b>--force-copy-unchanged</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;If an input artifact does not require any jetification changes, this option ensures it is still copied to the specified output directory.<br><br><b><b>--log-level</b> <<i>level</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the verbosity level for logging output. Common levels include `INFO`, `DEBUG`, `VERBOSE`, and `ERROR`.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays comprehensive help information about the command's usage and options, then exits.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the current version of the <b>Jetifier</b> tool and then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>Jetifier</b> tool is a utility provided by Google primarily for migrating Android libraries that use the deprecated <i>Android Support Library</i> to the new <i>AndroidX</i> namespace. <br> <br> When integrating older libraries into a modern Android project that uses AndroidX, compatibility issues can arise due to package and class name changes. <b>Jetifier</b> resolves these by transforming the bytecode of compiled libraries (JARs and AARs) to remap the old Support Library class and method references to their corresponding <i>AndroidX</i> equivalents. <br> <br> This transformation is crucial for projects that have already migrated to <i>AndroidX</i>, allowing them to use dependencies that haven't yet been updated by their maintainers. It operates by finding and replacing package names, classes, and methods, ensuring seamless integration. While it can be run standalone, <b>Jetifier</b> functionality is also deeply integrated into the Android Gradle Plugin, often running automatically during the build process when `android.enableJetifier=true` is set in `gradle.properties`.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>Jetifier</b> tool requires a Java Runtime Environment (JRE) to be installed on the system, as it is distributed as a JAR file. <br> <br> It is primarily designed for Android development workflows and is not a general-purpose Linux command. <br> <br> While powerful, it operates by bytecode transformation, which can sometimes lead to subtle issues if libraries employ complex obfuscation or highly custom class loading mechanisms. Always back up original files before processing. <br> <br> Its standalone use has decreased as its functionality is largely integrated into the Android Gradle Plugin, making direct command-line invocation less common for typical Android development.


title: DISTRIBUTION AND EXECUTION
content:
<b>Jetifier</b> is distributed as a Java Archive (JAR) file, typically named `jetifier-standalone.jar`. It must be executed using a Java Runtime Environment (JRE) via the command `java -jar jetifier-standalone.jar`. Users need to download the JAR file separately, as it's not a native executable included with standard Linux distributions.


title: INTEGRATION WITH ANDROID GRADLE PLUGIN
content:
For most Android developers, <b>Jetifier</b>'s functionality is seamlessly integrated into the Android Gradle Plugin. When `android.enableJetifier=true` is set in a project's `gradle.properties` file, Gradle automatically runs <b>Jetifier</b> on third-party dependencies during the build process, translating them to use <i>AndroidX</i> without requiring manual invocation of the command.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>Jetifier</b> tool was developed by Google as a critical component of the transition from the legacy <i>Android Support Library</i> to <i>AndroidX</i>. Introduced around the time of Android P (API 28), it became essential for projects migrating to AndroidX while still relying on third-party libraries built against the older Support Library. Its purpose was to automate the update of binary artifacts, ensuring backward compatibility and smoother migration for the Android ecosystem. While available as a standalone command-line tool, its most widespread use occurs automatically when enabled within the Android Gradle Plugin (e.g., by setting `android.enableJetifier=true` in `gradle.properties`), making it a background utility for most developers.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>l2test</B> [<I>options</I>] <I>arguments</I><br><br><I>Note: The exact synopsis and arguments for <I>l2test</I> are highly dependent on its specific implementation, as it is not a standard Linux command. The representation above is a generic placeholder for a specialized Layer 2 testing utility.</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-i <interface></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the network <I>interface</I> to use for testing (e.g., <I>eth0</I>).<br><br><b>-d <mac_address></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the destination MAC <I>address</I> for the Layer 2 frames.<br><br><b>-s <size></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the size of the Layer 2 test packets in bytes.<br><br><b>-c <count></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of test packets to send.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing more details about the test process and results.<br><br><b>-D</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug mode, providing extensive diagnostic information.<br><br><b>-t <type></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Ethernet <I>type</I> field for the test packets (e.g., 0x0806 for ARP, 0x86DD for IPv6).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>l2test</I> command is not a standard, widely available utility found in most general-purpose Linux distributions.<br><br>Historically, or in specialized embedded systems and network appliance contexts, an <I>l2test</I> utility might be present. Its primary purpose would be to perform low-level, Layer 2 (data link layer) network diagnostics. This typically involves sending and receiving raw Ethernet frames to test connectivity, MAC address reachability, and basic forwarding behavior on a local network segment (e.g., Ethernet, bridging).<br><br>Common use cases for such a tool would include: validating network interface card (NIC) functionality, testing bridge configurations, debugging specific Layer 2 protocols like ARP or NDP, and performing basic throughput or loopback tests at the data link layer. Because it's not a standard command, its exact functionality, syntax, and options vary significantly depending on its specific implementation and the environment it's designed for.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <I>l2test</I> command is <B>not a standard or widely available Linux utility</B> in most general-purpose distributions. Information provided here is based on the conceptual design of a Layer 2 testing tool. Specific implementations (if they exist in a particular custom environment or embedded system) will have their own unique syntax, options, and behaviors. Users should consult the documentation specific to their system or software package if an <I>l2test</I> command is present.


title: IMPLEMENTATION SPECIFICITY
content:
Due to its non-standard nature, any <I>l2test</I> utility encountered is likely part of a specific software package, kernel module, or vendor-specific distribution. Its capabilities and how it interacts with the network stack will be tailored to that particular implementation, potentially requiring specific kernel configurations or hardware.


title: PRIVILEGES
content:
Like most low-level network diagnostic tools that manipulate raw frames or interfaces, an <I>l2test</I> command would typically require root privileges or specific capabilities to function correctly.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>l2test</I> command, in its various forms, typically originates from specialized network device development, kernel module testing, or embedded Linux environments. It doesn't have a singular, well-documented history like common user-space utilities. References to tools with this name can be found in discussions related to early Linux bridging, specific NIC driver development, or custom network appliance firmware, where direct Layer 2 frame manipulation and testing are crucial. It has never been widely adopted as a standard diagnostic tool in mainstream Linux distributions.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i><b>linux64</b> is not a direct command.<br>It typically appears as a system identifier or architectural tag in various contexts, such as:<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>uname -m</b> <I> (outputs x86_64 or similar)</I><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>/path/to/software-linux64.bin</I><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>make target_linux64</I></i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>None</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>As <b>linux64</b> is not a standalone executable command, it does not accept command-line parameters or options.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>The term <b>linux64</b> does not refer to a standalone executable command in the way that <I>ls</I> or <I>grep</I> do. Instead, it is a common descriptor used across the Linux ecosystem to denote systems, kernels, or software components compiled for the 64-bit architecture, specifically x86-64 (also known as AMD64).<br><br>When you encounter <b>linux64</b>, it typically signifies that the underlying operating system and hardware support 64-bit instructions, allowing for larger memory addressing and enhanced performance. This distinguishes it from 32-bit (i386/i686) systems. It frequently appears in filenames for software packages (e.g., <I>package-linux64.tar.gz</I>), compilation targets, or as output from system information commands like <I>uname -m</I> (which would output <I>x86_64</I> on such systems).</i>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><b>linux64</b> is a descriptive term, not an executable command. Attempting to run <b>linux64</b> directly from the shell will result in a 'command not found' error unless a specific application or symbolic link has been named 'linux64' on that particular system, which is not a standard practice.</i>


title: COMMON USAGE CONTEXTS
content:
<i>While not a command, <b>linux64</b> is frequently encountered when:<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>Downloading Software:</b> Many software distributions provide separate packages for 32-bit and 64-bit architectures, often indicated by <I>-linux64</I> in the filename.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>System Information:</b> Commands like <I>uname -m</I> will output <I>x86_64</I> (the underlying architecture referred to by <b>linux64</b>) on a 64-bit system.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>Development:</b> Build systems and makefiles often have targets or variables like <I>ARCH=linux64</I> to specify the target architecture for compilation.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>The concept of 64-bit computing in Linux gained significant traction in the early 2000s with the advent of AMD's Opteron and Athlon 64 processors, which introduced the x86-64 instruction set. This architecture, later adopted by Intel (under the EM64T/Intel 64 branding), became the dominant standard for modern PCs and servers. The term <b>linux64</b> emerged as a clear way to distinguish between operating systems, kernels, and applications designed for this new 64-bit paradigm versus the older 32-bit (x86) standard. Its widespread adoption led to most modern Linux distributions being primarily 64-bit.</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>logname</b> command is a standard Unix utility used to print the login name of the current user. It retrieves this information from the user's login record, typically from the <i>utmp</i> or <i>wtmp</i> files, which record logins and logouts. This name is established at the time of the initial login session.<br><br>Unlike <b>whoami</b> or <b>id -un</b>, which report the <i>effective</i> username (which can change if a user switches identity using commands like <b>su</b> or <b>sudo</b>), <b>logname</b> typically reports the name of the user who <i>initially logged in</i> to the current controlling terminal. This distinction is crucial in scenarios where a script or application needs to identify the original user, rather than the current effective user. The command outputs the login name to standard output, followed by a newline character. It exits with a status code of 0 upon successful execution and a non-zero status code if an error occurs. <b>logname</b> is part of the POSIX standard utilities.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>logname</b> command distinguishes itself from similar commands like <b>whoami</b> or <b>id -un</b>. While the latter two report the <i>effective</i> username (which can change after using <b>su</b> or <b>sudo</b>), <b>logname</b> aims to report the name of the user who <i>initially logged in</i> to the current controlling terminal. This relies on accurate login records (e.g., <i>utmp</i> file) and may not provide meaningful output in contexts without a controlling terminal, such as cron jobs or system services.<br><br>Furthermore, if the <b>LOGNAME</b> environment variable is manually altered, some implementations might prioritize it over the actual login record, leading to potentially misleading results, although the POSIX standard specifies it should derive from the login record.


title: <B>EXIT STATUS</B>
content:
The <b>logname</b> command exits with status 0 upon success (login name found) and a non-zero status code if an error occurs or the login name cannot be determined.


title: <B>OUTPUT FORMAT</B>
content:
The command prints the determined login name to standard output, followed by a single newline character.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>logname</b> command is a fundamental utility that has been a part of Unix-like operating systems for a long time, dating back to early AT&T Unix versions. Its inclusion in the <b>POSIX.1</b> standard (<i>IEEE Std 1003.1</i>) underscores its importance as a consistent and reliable way to retrieve the user's login identity. It was designed to provide the name of the user associated with the current login session, distinct from the effective user ID which might change due to <b>su</b> or <b>sudo</b>. GNU coreutils provides a common implementation of <b>logname</b> for Linux systems, aligning with the POSIX specification while adding common <b>--help</b> and <b>--version</b> options.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
The <i><b>lxi</b></i> command typically functions as a dispatcher for various subcommands, each performing a specific task.<br><b>lxi</b> [<I>options</I>] <I>subcommand</I> [<I>subcommand_options</I>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, providing more detailed information about the command's execution and network interactions. This is useful for debugging and understanding the communication flow.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug output, which provides even more detailed information than verbose mode, often including low-level communication data. This option is primarily intended for developers and deep troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits. When used as <b>lxi --help</b>, it shows global options. When used as <b>lxi <I>subcommand</I> --help</b>, it provides help specific to that subcommand.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the program's version number and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>lxi</b></i> is the primary command-line interface for the <i>lxi-tools</i> suite, an open-source collection of software designed for controlling LXI (LAN eXtensions for Instrumentation) compatible devices. LXI is an Ethernet-based communication standard predominantly used in test and measurement instruments. The <i><b>lxi</b></i> command enables users to perform various operations directly from the command line, including discovering LXI instruments on a network, querying their status, sending SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands, and interacting with their low-level protocols. It provides a flexible and scriptable method for automating complex measurement setups in laboratory and industrial environments, leveraging the speed and reliability of Ethernet for instrument communication.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><b>lxi</b></i> is not a standard, pre-installed Linux command; it requires the installation of the <i>lxi-tools</i> package. Its functionality is dependent on the presence of LXI-compatible test and measurement instruments on the network. The command itself is primarily a dispatcher; most practical operations are performed through its various subcommands, each with its own set of options and usage patterns.


title: SUBCOMMANDS OVERVIEW
content:
The <i><b>lxi</b></i> command functions as a dispatcher for various specific operations, each handled by a distinct subcommand. Key subcommands include:<br><i><b>discover</b></i>: Scans the local network for available LXI instruments and displays their details.<br><i><b>instrument</b></i>: Provides detailed information, status, and control options for a specified LXI instrument.<br><i><b>scpi</b></i>: Allows sending Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments (SCPI) directly to an instrument and receiving responses.<br><i><b>vxi11</b></i>: Offers low-level access to the VXI-11 protocol, useful for advanced diagnostics or custom communication.<br>Each subcommand has its own specific set of options and arguments, which can be explored by running <b>lxi <I>subcommand</I> --help</b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>lxi-tools</i> project emerged as an open-source initiative to address the need for a free and accessible way to control LXI-compatible test and measurement instruments. Historically, controlling such devices often relied on proprietary software or expensive commercial solutions. The project aims to democratize instrument control by providing a robust command-line interface and library that integrates seamlessly into standard Linux environments. Its development is community-driven, focusing on interoperability, stability, and ease of use for engineers and researchers working with modern laboratory equipment, filling a significant gap in open-source instrument automation.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help, -h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b>--version, -V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print version information and exit.<br><br><b>--config <FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a path to a configuration file (e.g., <i>lychee.toml</i>).<br><br><b>--base-url <URL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a base URL for resolving relative links.<br><br><b>--exclude <PATTERN></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exclude links matching a glob pattern or a regular expression.<br><br><b>--include <PATTERN></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Only include links matching a glob pattern or a regular expression.<br><br><b>--no-progress</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable the progress bar during checks.<br><br><b>--retry-wait <SECS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Seconds to wait before retrying a failed request.<br><br><b>--max-redirects <NUM></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Maximum number of redirects to follow for a single link.<br><br><b>--timeout <SECS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Maximum time in seconds for a single HTTP request to complete.<br><br><b>--user-agent <AGENT_STRING></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a custom User-Agent header for HTTP requests.<br><br><b>--output <FORMAT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output format (e.g., <i>json</i>, <i>markdown</i>, <i>html</i>, <i>csv</i>).<br><br><b>--disable-external</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not check external links, only process internal links.<br><br><b>--disable-private</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not check links to private IP addresses.<br><br><b>--accept <STATUS_CODE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Accept specific HTTP status codes as valid (e.g., <i>403</i>, <i>500</i>).<br><br><b>--force-http-status-check</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force HTTP status check for all links, even for local files.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>lychee</b> is a powerful and versatile command-line tool designed for efficiently checking the validity of links across various sources. Written in Rust, it's renowned for its speed, concurrency, and comprehensive capabilities. It can scan URLs, local files, and even standard input for broken links, dead redirects, and other connectivity issues. <b>lychee</b> supports checking links within HTML, Markdown, reStructuredText, and even plain text files. Its core purpose is to help developers, website administrators, and content creators maintain the integrity of their web resources, preventing users from encountering frustrating "404 Not Found" errors. It's often integrated into CI/CD pipelines to automatically validate links during development workflows, ensuring that website deployments are always free of broken references. The tool offers extensive customization options for timeouts, concurrency, request headers, and output formats.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Network Dependency:</b> <i>lychee</i> requires network connectivity to check external URLs. <br><b>Rate Limiting:</b> Checking a large number of links on a single domain too quickly can trigger server-side rate limits, leading to temporary blocks or inaccurate results. <br><b>False Positives/Negatives:</b> Complex website configurations, JavaScript-driven content, or strict firewalls might occasionally lead to links being misidentified as broken or valid. <br><b>Resource Usage:</b> For very large projects with millions of links, <i>lychee</i> can consume significant network bandwidth and system resources due to its concurrent nature.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
<i>lychee</i> supports configuration files (e.g., <i>lychee.toml</i>) to store frequently used options, exclusions, and custom headers, simplifying complex checks and promoting consistency across projects.


title: OUTPUT FORMATS
content:
The tool provides flexible output options, including human-readable console output, JSON for machine processing, Markdown for reports, and HTML for interactive results, allowing users to integrate its findings into various reporting systems.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>lychee</i> emerged as a modern, high-performance link checker, leveraging the speed and memory safety of the Rust programming language. It was developed by the lychee-cli community with a focus on providing a robust solution for automated link validation. Its design prioritizes concurrency and comprehensive error reporting, making it particularly well-suited for integration into continuous integration (CI) and continuous delivery (CD) workflows. Since its initial release, it has gained significant traction among developers and DevOps teams for its reliability and ease of use in maintaining healthy web assets.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>lynis</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> [<i>options</i>]<br><br><u>Common commands:</u><br>  <b>lynis audit system</b><br>  <b>lynis show commands</b><br>  <b>lynis show help</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>audit system</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a full security audit of the entire system, checking hundreds of security controls.<br><br><b><b>show commands</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a list of all available commands and their basic purpose.<br><br><b><b>show help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows detailed help information about Lynis and its usage.<br><br><b><b>--checkall</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ensures all tests are run. This is the default behavior for 'audit system'.<br><br><b><b>--profile</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a custom profile file to use for the audit, allowing for tailored scanning.<br><br><b><b>--auditor</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the name of the auditor, which will be included in the report file.<br><br><b><b>--report-file</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets an alternative path and filename for the audit report.<br><br><b><b>--no-colors</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables colored output in the terminal, useful for non-interactive scripts.<br><br><b><b>--quick</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a faster audit by skipping some of the more time-consuming tests.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug mode, providing more detailed output for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the verbosity of the output, showing more information during the scan.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>Lynis</i> is a free, open-source security auditing and hardening tool for Unix-like operating systems, including Linux, macOS, BSD, and others.<br><br>It performs an extensive health check of your system, checking for hundreds of potential security vulnerabilities, misconfigurations, and weak points. Unlike tools that fix issues automatically, Lynis is non-invasive; it doesn't make any changes to your system. Instead, it provides a detailed report with security status, warnings, and actionable recommendations for improving your system's security posture.<br><br>Key areas scanned include boot services, kernel, memory and processes, shells, file systems, storage, networking, user accounts, authentication, databases, web services, SSH, and more. It's a valuable tool for system administrators and security professionals looking to enhance the security and compliance of their environments.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b><i>Root Privileges:</i></b> Lynis requires root privileges to perform a comprehensive system audit. Running it as a non-root user will result in incomplete results.<br><br><b><i>Recommendations, Not Fixes:</i></b> Lynis identifies issues and provides recommendations; it does not automatically fix vulnerabilities or misconfigurations. Manual intervention is required to implement the suggested hardening steps.<br><br><b><i>Resource Usage:</i></b> A full audit can be resource-intensive on some systems, potentially impacting performance during the scan.<br><br><b><i>False Positives:</i></b> While rare, some warnings or suggestions might be false positives or not applicable to specific system configurations, requiring careful review and interpretation of the report.<br><br><b><i>Regular Updates:</i></b> For the most accurate and up-to-date checks, it's crucial to keep Lynis itself updated regularly.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
<i>Lynis</i> can typically be installed via your operating system's package manager (e.g., <b>apt install lynis</b> on Debian/Ubuntu, <b>yum install lynis</b> on RHEL/CentOS) or by downloading the latest tarball from the official website and extracting it to a desired location (e.g., <b>/opt/lynis</b>).


title: TYPICAL USAGE FLOW
content:
After installation, the typical usage involves running <b>sudo lynis audit system</b> to initiate a full scan. The output is displayed in the terminal, and a detailed report is saved (by default to <b>/var/log/lynis-report.dat</b>). Review this report to identify security weaknesses and follow the provided recommendations to harden your system, then re-run Lynis to verify improvements.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>Lynis</i> was first released in 2007 by Michael van der Veen as a robust, open-source solution for security auditing. Initially developed to help system administrators harden Unix-based systems, it quickly gained traction due to its comprehensive nature and non-invasive approach. Over the years, it has seen continuous development and improvements, adding new tests, compliance standards, and features, establishing itself as a go-to tool for security professionals and sysadmins worldwide to assess and enhance system security.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>magento</b> [<i>global-options</i>] [<i>command</i>] [<i>command-options</i>] [<i>arguments</i>]<br>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b>, <b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help for the given command or lists all available commands.<br><br><b><b>--quiet</b>, <b>-q</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses all command output, useful for scripting.<br><br><b><b>--verbose</b>, <b>-v|-vv|-vvv</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the verbosity of messages: <b>-v</b> for normal output, <b>-vv</b> for more verbose debug output, and <b>-vvv</b> for full debug output.<br><br><b><b>--version</b>, <b>-V</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the Magento application version.<br><br><b><b>--no-interaction</b>, <b>-n</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents the command from asking interactive questions during execution.<br><br><b><b>--ansi</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces ANSI output, enabling colored and formatted text.<br><br><b><b>--no-ansi</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables ANSI output, useful for environments that don't support it.<br><br><b><b>--env</b>, <b>-e</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the application environment for the command (e.g., <i>developer</i>, <i>production</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>magento</b> command, typically invoked as <b>bin/magento</b> from the Magento root directory, is the primary command-line interface (CLI) tool for managing and developing Magento 2 e-commerce applications. It provides a robust set of functionalities for performing essential tasks that range from initial installation and configuration to routine maintenance and advanced development operations. Users can leverage this CLI for actions such as installing Magento, upgrading the platform, managing caches, reindexing data, enabling or disabling modules, configuring cron jobs, generating static files, and performing various database and user management operations. The <b>magento</b> CLI integrates deeply with Magento's architecture, allowing direct interaction with core components like dependency injection (DI) compilation and theme management. It streamlines many tasks that would otherwise require manual configuration or navigating the administrative panel, making it an indispensable tool for Magento developers and administrators.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>magento</b> command requires a correctly installed Magento instance and a compatible PHP environment. It must typically be executed from the root directory of the Magento installation using <b>bin/magento</b>. Many commands, especially setup and compilation tasks, can be resource-intensive, requiring significant server memory and CPU. Proper file system permissions are critical; ensure the user executing the command has read/write access to Magento files and directories.


title: FINDING COMMANDS
content:
To list all available top-level commands and their categories, run <b>bin/magento list</b> or <b>bin/magento --help</b>. To get detailed help for a specific command, use <b>bin/magento help &lt;command&gt;</b> (e.g., <b>bin/magento help cache:flush</b>).


title: EXECUTION CONTEXT
content:
While referred to as the 'magento' command, it is almost always executed from the root directory of a Magento installation using the executable script located at <b>bin/magento</b>. This ensures that the command has access to the correct Magento application context and configuration. It is crucial to ensure correct file system permissions for the user executing the command, especially for write operations like upgrades or cache cleaning.


title: HISTORY
content:
Prior to Magento 2 (released in 2015), Magento 1 did not have a standardized, official command-line tool for core operations; third-party tools like <i>n98-magerun</i> filled this gap. Magento 2 introduced the official <b>bin/magento</b> CLI tool, built upon the Symfony Console component. This marked a significant improvement in developer experience and enabled greater automation of Magento administration and development tasks. The tool has continued to evolve with subsequent Magento versions (e.g., 2.3, 2.4), adding new commands and refining existing functionalities to support the platform's growing capabilities.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>magick</b> [<i>global_options</i>] {<i>input_file</i> | <i>input_glob</i>} [<i>image_processing_options</i>] [<i>output_file</i>]<br><b>magick</b> [<i>global_options</i>] <i>subcommand</i> [<i>subcommand_options</i>] <i>arguments</i><br><br><i>Examples:</i><br><b>magick</b> <i>input.jpg</i> <b>-resize</b> <i>50%</i> <i>output.png</i><br><b>magick</b> <i>identify</i> <i>image.png</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-debug</b> <i>level</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable debug logging to help diagnose issues.<br><br><b><b>-limit</b> <i>resource value</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a resource limit (e.g., <i>memory</i>, <i>disk</i>, <i>threads</i>) to control consumption during processing.<br><br><b><b>-monitor</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Monitor program progress, displaying a percentage complete.<br><br><b><b>-verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print detailed information about the image and its processing steps.<br><br><b><b>-version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the ImageMagick version number and build features.<br><br><b><b>-help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a comprehensive list of all ImageMagick command-line options.<br><br><b><b>-resize</b> <i>geometry</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Resize an image. Examples: <i>50%</i>, <i>200x100</i>, <i>x150</i>.<br><br><b><b>-crop</b> <i>geometry</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Crop an image to a specified size and offset. Example: <i>100x100+10+10</i>.<br><br><b><b>-quality</b> <i>value</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the image compression quality for formats like JPEG (0-100).<br><br><b><b>-format</b> <i>format</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output image format (e.g., <i>png</i>, <i>gif</i>, <i>webp</i>).<br><br><b><b>-gravity</b> <i>direction</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Control placement when compositing or drawing text (e.g., <i>NorthWest</i>, <i>Center</i>).<br><br><b><b>-fill</b> <i>color</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the fill color for subsequent drawing operations.<br><br><b><b>-pointsize</b> <i>value</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the font size for text annotation.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>magick</i> is the unified command-line tool from the <i>ImageMagick</i> suite, a powerful open-source software suite for creating, editing, composing, or converting bitmap images. It supports over 200 image file formats (e.g., JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, DPX, EXR, WebP, PDF, SVG).<br><br>The <i>magick</i> command consolidates the functionality of older ImageMagick tools like <i>convert</i>, <i>mogrify</i>, <i>identify</i>, <i>composite</i>, and <i>display</i> into a single executable, allowing for simpler command invocation. It's widely used for batch processing, web development, graphic design, and scientific applications where image manipulation is required. Capabilities include resizing, cropping, color adjustment, applying filters, adding text, drawing, and more. It is designed to be scriptable, enabling complex image workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>magick</i> can be very resource-intensive, especially with large images or complex operations, potentially consuming significant CPU, memory, and disk I/O. Its extensive options provide immense power but also contribute to a steep learning curve for advanced usage. Older ImageMagick versions had known security vulnerabilities (e.g., 'ImageTragick'), so keeping your ImageMagick installation updated is crucial, especially when processing untrusted user-supplied content.


title: SUBCOMMANDS
content:
While <i>magick</i> can perform many operations directly, it also supports subcommands like <i>convert</i>, <i>identify</i>, <i>mogrify</i>, <i>composite</i>, <i>compare</i>, etc. For example, <i>magick convert input.jpg output.png</i> is equivalent to <i>magick input.jpg output.png</i> when only simple conversion/manipulation is needed, but <i>magick identify image.png</i> is the preferred way to get image information.


title: SCRIPTING AND AUTOMATION
content:
<i>magick</i> is designed to be highly scriptable, making it ideal for automating repetitive image tasks. It can be easily integrated into shell scripts (Bash, Zsh), Python, PHP, Perl, and other programming languages, allowing for dynamic image generation and processing in web applications or backend services.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ImageMagick</i> was first released in 1990 by John Cristy at DuPont. Over the years, it evolved into a comprehensive suite of command-line tools. Historically, different functions were handled by separate executables like <i>convert</i> (for conversions), <i>identify</i> (for image info), and <i>mogrify</i> (for in-place modifications). With ImageMagick 7, the <i>magick</i> command was introduced as a unified front-end, consolidating these functionalities to simplify invocation and improve consistency, making it the primary interface for most operations.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-D</b><<i>name</i>>[<b>=</b><<i>value</i>>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines a preprocessor symbol. This allows for conditional compilation within the NSIS script, enabling features or configuration based on build parameters. For example, <b>-DVERSION=1.0</b>.<br><br><b><b>-X</b><<i>command</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes an NSIS command during compilation. This can be used to override directives in the script or inject specific commands at compile time, such as setting the output file: <b>-X"OutFile setup.exe"</b>.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>[<i>0-4</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the verbosity level of the compiler output. <br><b>0</b>: Silent (only errors). <br><b>1</b>: Default. <br><b>2</b>: Detailed (show all commands). <br><b>3</b>: Debug (show all commands and macro expansions). <br><b>4</b>: Debug with stack.<br><br><b><b>-WX</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treats all compiler warnings as errors, causing the compilation to fail if any warnings are generated. This promotes stricter code quality in NSIS scripts.<br><br><b><b>-NOCONFIG</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents <i>makensis</i> from reading the default <i>nsis.ini</i> configuration file. This ensures a clean compilation environment, ignoring any user-specific compiler settings.<br><br><b><b>-HDRINFO</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays information about the NSIS header (e.g., compressed size, uncompressed size). Useful for optimizing installer size.<br><br><b><b>-VERSION</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the <i>makensis</i> compiler.<br><br><b><b>-LICENSE</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the license information for NSIS.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>makensis</i> command is the compiler for the Nullsoft Scriptable Install System (NSIS), a powerful, script-driven installer creation tool for Microsoft Windows. It takes an NSIS script file (typically with a <i>.nsi</i> extension) as input and compiles it into a compact, self-contained Windows executable (<i>.exe</i>) installer. NSIS is known for its small overhead, flexible scripting language, and ability to create custom installers for software distribution. <i>makensis</i> enables developers on Linux (or macOS) to build Windows installers without needing a Windows environment, making it a valuable tool in cross-platform development and CI/CD pipelines.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <i>makensis</i> runs on Linux, the installers it produces are native Windows executables (<i>.exe</i>) and will not run directly on Linux without compatibility layers like <b>Wine</b>.<br>The command relies entirely on the provided NSIS script (<i>.nsi</i> file) for its instructions, meaning that creating an installer requires prior knowledge and authoring of the NSIS scripting language.


title: NSIS SCRIPTING LANGUAGE
content:
NSIS uses a simple, yet powerful, scripting language that allows for complex installer logic, including file operations, registry modifications, shortcut creation, custom pages, and more. It supports variables, conditional statements, and functions, making it highly customizable.


title: CROSS-PLATFORM DEVELOPMENT
content:
<i>makensis</i> is frequently used in continuous integration and continuous delivery (CI/CD) pipelines running on Linux-based servers. This allows developers to automatically build Windows installers for their applications as part of their automated build process, streamlining software releases.


title: HISTORY
content:
NSIS was originally developed by Nullsoft, the creators of Winamp and Gnutella, in the early 2000s as an internal tool for their software. It was later released as open-source software under the zlib license, allowing it to gain widespread adoption and be actively maintained by a community of developers. The <i>makensis</i> compiler became a critical component in enabling cross-platform development workflows, especially for projects targeting Windows from non-Windows operating systems.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove a trailing newline character from each line read.<br><br><b>-n count</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read at most <i>count</i> lines. If <i>count</i> is 0, all lines are read.<br><br><b>-O origin</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Start assigning to <i>array</i> at index <i>origin</i>. Defaults to 0.<br><br><b>-s count</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skip the first <i>count</i> lines read before assigning.<br><br><b>-u fd</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read lines from file descriptor <i>fd</i> instead of standard input (stdin).<br><br><b>-d delimiter</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use <i>delimiter</i> to terminate lines instead of the default newline character. The delimiter is <b>not</b> removed.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mapfile</b> command, also known as <b>readarray</b>, is a Bash built-in that reads lines from standard input or a specified file descriptor into an indexed array variable. It's an efficient way to populate a Bash array, especially when dealing with line-oriented data. It allows for various options like skipping lines, limiting the number of lines read, removing trailing newlines, and specifying a custom delimiter.<br><br>This command is often preferred over traditional <i>while read line</i> loops for its performance benefits and conciseness when the goal is to load an entire file or stream into memory for further processing as an array. It simplifies tasks such as processing command output line-by-line or handling configuration files.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>mapfile</b> is a <b>Bash built-in</b> command, not an external executable. This means it's part of the shell itself and its behavior might vary slightly between Bash versions.</li><li>Reading very large files into memory using <b>mapfile</b> can consume significant system resources, as the entire content is loaded into an array.</li><li>When a custom delimiter is used with <b>-d</b>, the delimiter itself is <b>not</b> removed from the line unless explicitly handled by the user.</li></ul>


title: DEFAULT BEHAVIOR
content:
If no <i>array</i> name is specified, the command uses a default array named <b>MAPFILE</b> to store the lines.


title: RETURN STATUS
content:
<b>mapfile</b> returns 0 unless an invalid option is encountered, an invalid file descriptor is specified, or the <i>array</i> variable is not a valid array name or is read-only.


title: COMMON USAGE
content:
It is frequently used with process substitution or pipes, e.g., <i>mapfile -t <(grep pattern file.txt)</i> to get filtered lines, or <i>ls -l | mapfile -t myArray</i> to capture `ls` output.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>readarray</b> built-in was introduced in <b>Bash 4.0</b>. The <b>mapfile</b> alias was added in <b>Bash 4.0</b> as well, providing a more intuitive name for its primary function. Its development aimed to offer a more efficient and direct way to populate arrays from file or stream input, addressing common scripting patterns where line-by-line processing via <i>while read</i> loops could be less performant or verbose.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><B>--help</B>, <B>-h</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays standard help options for the command.<br><br><b><B>--help-all</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows all available help options, including GTK+, MATE, and Bonobo activation options.<br><br><b><B>--help-gtk</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays GTK+ toolkit-specific options.<br><br><b><B>--help-mate</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows MATE-specific options.<br><br><b><B>--help-bonobo-activation</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays Bonobo activation options.<br><br><b><B>--lookup=WORD</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initiates a dictionary lookup for the specified <B>WORD</B> immediately upon launch.<br><br><b><B>--server=SERVER</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the address or hostname of the DICT server to connect to.<br><br><b><B>--port=PORT</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the port number for the DICT server connection.<br><br><b><B>--database=DATABASE</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a particular dictionary database to search within on the server (e.g., "gcide", "wordnet").<br><br><b><B>--uri=URI</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Looks up a word using a dictionary URI, typically in the format <I>dict:///word</I>.<br><br><b><B>--no-window</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents the main application window from appearing. Primarily useful for specific integration scenarios as <I>mate-dictionary</I> is a GUI application.<br><br><b><B>--quiet</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses non-fatal error messages.<br><br><b><B>--version</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of the <I>mate-dictionary</I> application and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>mate-dictionary</I> command launches the graphical dictionary application for the MATE Desktop Environment. It provides a user-friendly interface to look up definitions, synonyms, antonyms, and more for words and phrases. The application supports various dictionary sources, including local dictionary files and remote DICT servers, allowing users to access a wide range of linguistic resources. It integrates seamlessly within the MATE ecosystem, offering quick lookups and comprehensive information, making it an indispensable tool for writers, students, and anyone needing quick word definitions or linguistic insights. Its intuitive design simplifies the process of exploring language and expanding vocabulary.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><I>mate-dictionary</I> is primarily a graphical user interface (GUI) application. While it offers command-line options for specific actions like lookups, its main functionality is accessed through its window.</li><li>It requires a DICT server (either local or remote) to provide definitions. Without configured servers or local dictionaries, its functionality will be limited.</li><li>Being part of the MATE Desktop Environment, it may have dependencies specific to MATE, which could be relevant if running in a non-MATE environment.</li></ul>


title: GUI USAGE
content:
While <I>mate-dictionary</I> can be launched from the terminal, its primary mode of operation is through its graphical window. Users can type words into the search bar, browse through definitions, switch between available dictionary sources, and manage their server connections and preferences within the application's interface.


title: DICT SERVER CONFIGURATION
content:
The application allows users to configure and manage multiple DICT servers. This can include public online servers or private local servers. Configuration options typically include server address, port, and selection of specific databases to search, providing flexibility in accessing diverse linguistic resources.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>mate-dictionary</I> originated as <I>gnome-dictionary</I> within the GNOME 2 desktop environment. When the MATE Desktop Environment was forked from GNOME 2 to preserve its traditional user interface, <I>gnome-dictionary</I> was also forked and rebranded as <I>mate-dictionary</I>. It continues to be actively maintained as a core component of the MATE project, providing a stable and feature-rich dictionary application consistent with the MATE desktop philosophy.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mbw</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>memory_size_in_MB</i><br>Example: <b>mbw</b> <i>1024</i><br>Example: <b>mbw</b> <i>-n 5 -a 2048</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>memory_size_in_MB</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The size of the memory block in megabytes on which the benchmark will be performed. This is a mandatory argument unless <i>-h</i> or <i>-V</i> is used.<br><br><b>-n <iterations></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of iterations to run the benchmark. The default is 1.<br><br><b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(all) Runs all available benchmark methods (copy, write, fill) sequentially. If not specified, only <i>memcpy</i> is run by default.<br><br><b>-t <type></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects a specific test type.<br><i>0</i>: <i>memcpy</i> (default, standard C library copy)<br><i>1</i>: <i>memset</i> (standard C library set)<br><i>2</i>: <i>memfill</i> (fill memory with a specific pattern)<br><i>3</i>: <i>copy_mem_fwd</i> (manual copy forward)<br><i>4</i>: <i>copy_mem_bwd</i> (manual copy backward)<br><i>5</i>: <i>copy_mem_rand</i> (manual copy with random access)<br><br><b>-b <block_size></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the block size in MB for each chunk of memory accessed. This affects how much data is processed in one go. Default is typically <i>memory_size_in_MB</i>.<br><br><b>-s <stride></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the stride size in bytes, primarily used with <i>copy_mem_rand</i> to define access patterns.<br><br><b>-o</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs results in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format, useful for scripting and data analysis.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br><b>-V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>mbw</b> (Memory Bandwidth Benchmark) is a lightweight command-line utility for Linux systems designed to measure the memory bandwidth performance of a system. It works by performing various memory operations, such as copying, writing, and filling blocks of memory, and then calculates the speed at which these operations can be completed, typically expressed in megabytes per second (MB/s).<br><br>This tool is invaluable for system administrators, developers, and hardware enthusiasts who need to quickly assess memory performance, identify potential bottlenecks, or compare the memory throughput across different hardware configurations. While not a substitute for comprehensive benchmark suites, <b>mbw</b> provides a fast and straightforward way to get a snapshot of memory read and write speeds, offering insights into the overall memory subsystem's efficiency and responsiveness. It's particularly useful for diagnosing memory-related performance issues or validating memory upgrades.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The results from <b>mbw</b> should be interpreted with caution. Memory bandwidth measurements can be significantly influenced by factors such as CPU cache effectiveness (L1, L2, L3), compiler optimizations, the operating system's memory management, and other concurrent processes. <b>mbw</b> provides a synthetic benchmark; therefore, its results may not perfectly reflect real-world application performance, which can depend on specific access patterns and data locality. Ensure sufficient free physical memory is available for the test size to avoid swapping, which would heavily skew results.


title: INTERPRETING RESULTS
content:
The output of <b>mbw</b> typically shows the method used (e.g., <i>memcpy</i>, <i>memset</i>), the block size, and the calculated memory bandwidth in MB/s. Higher values generally indicate better memory performance. When using <i>-a</i>, multiple lines will be output, one for each method. The <i>copy_mem_rand</i> test can be particularly useful for simulating less sequential memory access patterns.


title: PERMISSIONS
content:
<b>mbw</b> usually does not require special permissions. It operates within user space, performing standard memory allocation and access operations. However, running it in an environment with restricted memory limits (like a cgroup) might affect results or cause allocation failures.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>mbw</b> is a relatively old and stable utility, typically maintained as a standalone open-source project. Its development has focused on providing a simple, quick way to assess memory throughput without complex dependencies. It has been refined over the years to include various access patterns and output options, adapting to different system architectures and performance analysis needs. While not part of the core Linux utilities, it's widely available in many distributions' repositories due to its utility in system diagnostics and benchmarking.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
Not applicable: <B>mcomp</B> is not a standard Linux command.<BR>Its syntax is dependent on its custom implementation.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <B>mcomp</B> is not a standard Linux utility found in common distributions. It does not have a universally recognized man page or default installation. It most likely refers to a custom script, an internal command within a specific application, or a component of a specialized toolchain developed for a particular environment. Therefore, its exact functionality, available options, and specific usage depend entirely on the context in which it appears. Users encountering <B>mcomp</B> should consult the documentation or source code of the system, project, or application it belongs to for accurate information.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Since <B>mcomp</B> is not a standard command, its behavior, options, and availability are highly variable. It might be a placeholder for <I>make compile</I>, <I>m4</I> related compilation, or a project-specific tool. Relying on its existence or specific behavior across different systems is not advisable without explicit documentation from the system where it is used.


title: HISTORY
content:
There is no general history for <B>mcomp</B> as a standalone Linux command. Its origin and development are tied to the specific project or application that defines and utilizes it, rather than being part of the core GNU/Linux utilities.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<pre>mdadm <i>[mode]</i> &lt;RAID-device&gt; <i>[options]</i> &lt;component-devices&gt;</pre><br>Common modes include:<br><pre>mdadm --create &lt;RAID-device&gt; --level=&lt;level&gt; --raid-devices=&lt;num&gt; &lt;component-devices&gt;</pre><pre>mdadm --assemble &lt;RAID-device&gt; &lt;component-devices&gt;</pre><pre>mdadm --detail &lt;RAID-device&gt;</pre><pre>mdadm --examine &lt;component-device&gt;</pre><pre>mdadm --manage &lt;RAID-device&gt; --add &lt;device&gt;</pre><pre>mdadm --monitor <i>[options]</i></pre>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--create or -C</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a new RAID array.<br><br><b>--assemble or -A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Assemble a pre-existing array from its components.<br><br><b>--build or -B</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create an array without a superblock (legacy, rarely used).<br><br><b>--manage or -M</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manage an array (e.g., add, remove, fail, replace devices).<br><br><b>--monitor or -F</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Monitor one or more arrays for events (e.g., component failure).<br><br><b>--detail or -D</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display detailed information about an array.<br><br><b>--examine or -E</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Examine a device for an md superblock.<br><br><b>--level=<i>&lt;level&gt;</i> or -l</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the RAID level (e.g., 0, 1, 5, 6, 10).<br><br><b>--raid-devices=<i>&lt;num&gt;</i> or -n</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the number of active devices in the array.<br><br><b>--spare-devices=<i>&lt;num&gt;</i> or -x</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the number of spare devices.<br><br><b>--chunk=<i>&lt;size&gt;</i> or -c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the chunk size in kilobytes.<br><br><b>--add <i>&lt;device&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add a device to an array.<br><br><b>--remove <i>&lt;device&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove a device from an array.<br><br><b>--fail <i>&lt;device&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mark a device as faulty within the array.<br><br><b>--replace <i>&lt;device&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Replace a failed device with another.<br><br><b>--verbose or -v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide more detailed output.<br><br><b>--force or -f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force an operation that might otherwise be rejected.<br><br><b>--uuid=<i>&lt;uuid&gt;</i> or -u</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the UUID of an array or component.<br><br><b>--zero-superblock</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overwrite existing md superblocks on devices. <b>USE WITH EXTREME CAUTION!</b><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
mdadm is a powerful and versatile utility designed for managing Linux software RAID (MD, or Multiple Device) arrays. It provides a comprehensive set of functions to create, assemble, monitor, manage, and remove RAID devices. Unlike hardware RAID solutions, software RAID leverages the system's CPU to perform RAID operations, making it a flexible and cost-effective solution for data redundancy and performance. mdadm supports various RAID levels, including <b>RAID0</b> (striping), <b>RAID1</b> (mirroring), <b>RAID4</b>, <b>RAID5</b> (striping with distributed parity), <b>RAID6</b> (striping with double distributed parity), and <b>RAID10</b> (mirrored stripes). It integrates seamlessly with the Linux kernel's MD driver, allowing users to configure and maintain robust storage solutions. Key functionalities include adding/removing drives from an array, replacing failed drives, monitoring array health, and growing arrays. mdadm consolidates the functionality of older <i>raidtools</i> utilities into a single, unified command, making it the standard for software RAID management on Linux systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <i>mdadm</i> incorrectly can lead to <b>severe data loss</b>. Always ensure you have backups before performing array modifications.<br>Requires root privileges to execute most operations.<br>Properly configuring <i>mdadm.conf</i> is crucial for arrays to be assembled automatically on boot. Without it, manual assembly might be required or arrays may not start.<br>Performance of software RAID is dependent on CPU resources and I/O bandwidth of the underlying disks.<br>Understanding RAID levels and disk partitioning is essential for effective use. Incorrect partitioning (e.g., not using type FD) can lead to issues.


title: MODES OF OPERATION
content:
<i>mdadm</i> operates in distinct modes, which dictate its primary function:<br><ul><li><i><b>Create Mode (--create)</b></i>: Used for building a new RAID array from scratch.</li><li><i><b>Assemble Mode (--assemble)</b></i>: Used to gather components and start an array that already exists but is not currently active.</li><li><i><b>Manage Mode (--manage)</b></i>: Used for performing administrative tasks on an active array, such as adding or removing disks, or marking disks as faulty.</li><li><i><b>Monitor Mode (--monitor)</b></i>: Runs as a daemon to constantly check the status of arrays and report events (e.g., disk failure, rebuild completion).</li><li><i><b>Detail Mode (--detail)</b></i>: Provides extensive information about a specific active RAID array.</li><li><i><b>Examine Mode (--examine)</b></i>: Inspects a potential RAID component device for an md superblock, showing details about the array it belongs to.</li></ul>


title: MD SUPERBLOCKS
content:
<i>mdadm</i> arrays typically use metadata blocks called <b>superblocks</b>, which are stored on each component disk. These superblocks contain crucial information about the RAID array, including its level, UUID, number of devices, and position of the device within the array. This allows <i>mdadm</i> to identify and assemble arrays automatically, even after reboots or disk rearrangements, without relying solely on a central configuration file. The `--zero-superblock` option should be used with extreme care, as it can destroy this critical metadata.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE (`MDADM.CONF`)
content:
The <i>mdadm.conf</i> file (typically located at <i>/etc/mdadm/mdadm.conf</i> or <i>/etc/mdadm.conf</i>) plays a vital role in persistent array management. It defines arrays that should be automatically assembled at boot time, provides aliases for array devices, and specifies monitoring parameters. While <i>mdadm</i> can examine disks to find and assemble arrays, the configuration file ensures reliable and consistent setup across reboots, especially for complex or multi-path arrays.


title: HISTORY
content:
Linux software RAID has been an integral part of the kernel for many years, evolving significantly since its early days. The <i>mdadm</i> utility was developed to replace and consolidate the older collection of <i>raidtools</i> utilities (like <i>mkraid</i>, <i>raidstart</i>, <i>raidstop</i>) into a single, more robust, and user-friendly command. This transition occurred around the Linux kernel 2.4 era and became widely adopted for its efficiency and improved management capabilities, such as advanced monitoring and hot-swap support. Its continuous development ensures compatibility with new kernel features and modern storage requirements.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display usage of all files, not just subdirectories.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Don't print an error message if the directory is empty.<br><br><b>-u</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a grand total only for each directory (Unix-style summary).<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display detailed information about each file and directory (verbose).<br><br><b>-L</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Same as <b>-v</b>, but also displays information about sectors (long format).<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print progress messages when searching large directories.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print sizes in human readable format (e.g., 1K, 234M, 2G).<br><br><b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints one entry per line, suitable for tabulation.<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints sizes in cluster units.<br><br><b>-b</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints sizes in bytes (this is the default).<br><br><b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints only directories.<br><br><b>-D</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays empty directories.<br><br><b>-H</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays hidden files (those with the hidden attribute set).<br><br><b>-U</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays system files (those with the system attribute set).<br><br><b>-R</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recursively display directories (this is the default).<br><br><b>-V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the volume label.<br><br><b>-P</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display all files and directories, including hidden and system files (same as <b>-H -U</b>).<br><br><b>-f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Fast mode; skip FAT checks.<br><br><b>-o <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an output file for the log.<br><br><b><i>msdos_path</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the MS-DOS directory. If no path is specified, the current working directory is used.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mdu</i> is a utility included with the <br><i>mtools</i> package, which provides a set of tools for accessing MS-DOS filesystems from a Unix-like environment, such as Linux. Unlike the standard <b>du</b> command which works with native Linux filesystems, <i>mdu</i> is specifically designed to analyze disk usage on MS-DOS formatted disks or disk images. It functions much like the Unix <b>du</b> command, allowing users to display the directory tree structure and calculate the disk space consumed by files and subdirectories within an MS-DOS filesystem.<br><br>This command is particularly useful when you need to inspect the contents and space allocation of legacy MS-DOS floppy disks, partitions, or disk images mounted via <i>mtools</i>. It can show sizes in bytes, human-readable format, or cluster units, providing various levels of detail from a concise summary to a verbose listing of all files and their attributes. Its primary use case revolves around managing and understanding data on MS-DOS media within a Linux environment, rather than general Linux filesystem analysis.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>mdu</b> command is not a general-purpose disk usage tool for native Linux filesystems. It is specifically designed for and only works with MS-DOS formatted disks or disk images. It requires the <b>mtools</b> package to be installed on your system, which might not be present by default on all Linux distributions.


title: USAGE CONTEXT
content:
The <b>mdu</b> command is primarily relevant for users who need to interact with or analyze data on MS-DOS formatted media, such as old floppy disks, USB drives formatted with FAT, or disk images containing MS-DOS filesystems. It is not suitable for analyzing disk usage on modern Linux filesystems like Ext4, XFS, or Btrfs; for those, the standard <b>du</b> command is used.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>mdu</b> command is an integral part of the <b>mtools</b> software suite. <b>mtools</b> is a collection of utilities developed to enable Unix-like operating systems to access and manipulate MS-DOS formatted disks and files without needing to mount them. Its development dates back to the early days of Linux and other Unix-like systems, when MS-DOS compatibility was crucial for data exchange. While the prevalence of MS-DOS media has significantly declined, <b>mtools</b> and thus <b>mdu</b> continue to be maintained for legacy system support and niche applications, primarily by its original author, Alain Knaff.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>memdiskfind</b></i> is a specialized utility primarily associated with the <I>SYSLINUX</I> / <I>ISOLINUX</I> project. Its core function is to programmatically locate a <I>memdisk</I> image that has been previously loaded into system memory by the <I>memdisk</I> utility. <br><br>The <I>memdisk</I> utility itself is designed to boot entire disk images (e.g., floppy images, hard disk images, or ISO files) directly from RAM. When such an image is loaded, <I><b>memdiskfind</b></I> can then be invoked to determine its exact memory address. This capability is crucial in advanced boot environments or multi-stage boot processes, where subsequent bootloaders, kernels, or applications need to know the precise location of the in-memory disk image to access its contents and continue the boot sequence. It operates by scanning specific memory regions for the unique signature of a loaded <I>memdisk</I> image. Unlike typical Linux commands, <I><b>memdiskfind</b></I> is generally not used interactively but rather as an internal component within boot scripts or the <I>memdisk</I> program's logic.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><b>memdiskfind</b></i> is not a general-purpose Linux command for interactive shell use. It is highly specialized and specific to the <I>SYSLINUX</I>/<I>ISOLINUX</I> boot environment and the <I>memdisk</I> utility. It serves primarily as an internal helper within boot processes. It requires a <I>memdisk</I> image to be loaded into memory by the <I>memdisk</I> utility for it to have any meaningful function. Running it in a standard Linux environment without <I>memdisk</I> context will yield no useful result or may indicate no image found.


title: INTERNAL UTILITY NATURE
content:
<i><b>memdiskfind</b></i> is rarely, if ever, executed directly by users from a conventional command-line interface. Instead, it functions as an internal subroutine or mechanism within the <I>memdisk</I> utility itself, or it might be called implicitly by custom boot scripts (e.g., within <I>syslinux.cfg</I> configurations) during the boot process. Its purpose is to internally provide the memory address of the loaded <I>memdisk</I> image to other boot components—such as the kernel, an <I>initramfs</I>, or a subsequent bootloader—that need to interact with the contents of the in-memory disk image. Due to this specialized, internal role, <i><b>memdiskfind</b></i> does not accept user-defined options or arguments.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><b>memdiskfind</b></i> is an integral component of the <I>SYSLINUX</I> Project, a suite of bootloaders primarily maintained by H. Peter Anvin. It developed alongside the <I>memdisk</I> utility, which was created to address the need for booting various disk images from RAM, especially in environments where direct disk access was inconvenient or impossible (e.g., netbooting). Its functionality has remained consistent since its inception: to programmatically locate the <I>memdisk</I> image in memory, facilitating complex boot scenarios and chaining of bootloaders. Its development is tied to the evolution and maintenance of the broader <I>SYSLINUX</I> project.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b>, <b>--artist=</b><i>ARTIST</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or get the artist frame.<br><br><b><b>-A</b>, <b>--album=</b><i>ALBUM</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or get the album frame.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--title=</b><i>TITLE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or get the title frame.<br><br><b><b>-T</b>, <b>--track=</b><i>TRACK</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or get the track number frame.<br><br><b><b>-g</b>, <b>--genre=</b><i>GENRE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or get the genre frame.<br><br><b><b>-Y</b>, <b>--year=</b><i>YEAR</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or get the year frame.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--comment=</b><i>DESCRIPTION:TEXT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or get a comment frame. <i>DESCRIPTION</i> is optional.<br><br><b><b>-G</b>, <b>--image=</b><i>FILENAME:TYPE[:DESCRIPTION]</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add an image frame (e.g., album art). <i>TYPE</i> specifies image role (e.g., 'cover (front)').<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--synch-v1-to-v2</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Synchronize existing ID3v1 tags to ID3v2 tags.<br><br><b><b>-S</b>, <b>--synch-v2-to-v1</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Synchronize existing ID3v2 tags to ID3v1 tags.<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list-frames</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all known ID3v2 frame types and their descriptions.<br><br><b><b>-L</b>, <b>--list-images</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all image frames (album art) found in the file(s).<br><br><b><b>--delete-frames=</b><i>FID1,FID2,...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete specific ID3v2 frames by their four-character ID (e.g., 'TPE1', 'APIC').<br><br><b><b>--delete-all</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete all ID3v2 tags from the file(s).<br><br><b><b>--delete-all-unsynced</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete all ID3v2 frames that do not have a corresponding ID3v1 tag.<br><br><b><b>--delete-all-versions</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete both ID3v1 and ID3v2 tags from the file(s).<br><br><b><b>--delete-v1</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete all ID3v1 tags from the file(s).<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--dry-run</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not write changes to the file(s); only show what would happen.<br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--encoding=</b><i>ENCODING</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the text encoding for new frames (e.g., 'utf8', 'utf16').<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print more detailed information about operations.<br><br><b><b>--id3v2-version=</b><i>VERSION</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the ID3v2 version for new tags (e.g., '3' for v2.3, '4' for v2.4).<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the program's version number and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mid3v2</i> is a powerful command-line utility used for viewing, adding, modifying, and deleting ID3v2 tags in audio files, primarily MP3s. It is part of the <b>mutagen</b> library, a Python module designed to handle audio metadata.<br><br>Unlike its predecessor <i>id3v2</i>, <i>mid3v2</i> offers robust support for various tag frames, different ID3v2 versions (v2.3, v2.4), and character encodings, making it more reliable for modern tagging needs. It can manage common fields like artist, album, title, year, genre, and also more complex ones such as album art, comments, and custom frames.<br><br>It provides options for listing existing tags, adding new ones, deleting specific frames or all tags, and synchronizing tags between different versions. Its design focuses on being cross-platform and handling a wide array of audio file formats and tag types, although its primary use case is ID3v2 for MP3s.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>mid3v2</i> modifies files in place, so it is <b>highly recommended</b> to back up your files before making extensive changes.<br><br>While <i>mid3v2</i> generally handles different ID3v2 versions well, interoperability issues can sometimes arise with very old or non-standard compliant tag editors. Some operations might slightly increase file size due to ID3v2 tag padding.


title: ID3V2 VERSIONS
content:
<i>mid3v2</i> supports both ID3v2.3 and ID3v2.4. By default, it creates new tags using ID3v2.4, which is the latest recommended standard, offering improved Unicode support and more flexible frame types. You can explicitly set the version for new tags using the <b>--id3v2-version</b> option.


title: CHARACTER ENCODING
content:
A significant improvement over older tools, <i>mid3v2</i> handles various character encodings for text frames. New frames default to <b>UTF-8</b> encoding, which is crucial for correctly displaying non-ASCII characters. The <b>--encoding</b> option allows users to specify an alternative encoding if needed.


title: FRAME IDENTIFIERS
content:
ID3v2 tags use four-character frame identifiers (e.g., <b>TPE1</b> for Artist, <b>TIT2</b> for Title, <b>APIC</b> for Attached Picture). <i>mid3v2</i> provides direct manipulation of these frames using their IDs, offering granular control over tag data beyond common, simplified options.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>mid3v2</i> was developed as part of the <b>mutagen</b> Python library. It emerged to address several limitations found in older ID3 tag editors, such as the original <i>id3v2</i> tool, particularly regarding robust character encoding support, handling of different ID3v2 versions (v2.3 and v2.4), and a wider array of tag frames.<br><br>Its development reflects the ongoing need for a more modern, reliable, and standards-compliant ID3 tag editor for Unix-like systems. <b>mutagen</b> provides a comprehensive framework for audio metadata, and <i>mid3v2</i> serves as its primary command-line interface for ID3v2 tag manipulation.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>minfo</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <I>Msdos_file</I> [<I>Msdos_file</I> ...]<br><br><i>Where:</i><br><i>OPTIONS</i> are zero or more of the command-line options.<br><I>Msdos_file</I> refers to the path of the file(s) within the MS-DOS filesystem to query.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-n</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not print the filename before displaying the file information.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produce raw output. This option prints the MS-DOS file attributes in their raw, numerical format.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display statistics about the file, such as its size in bytes and the number of clusters it occupies.<br><br><b>-i <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the MS-DOS image <I>file</I> (e.g., a disk image) from which to read the MS-DOS filesystem. If not provided, <b>minfo</b> will attempt to use default configurations or environment variables like MTOOLS_FAT_INFO to determine the target.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>minfo</b> command is part of the <I>mtools</I> suite, a collection of utilities for accessing MS-DOS filesystems from Unix-like operating systems. It allows users to retrieve detailed information about specific files residing on an MS-DOS formatted disk, floppy image, or partition. This includes attributes like file size, creation date, last modification date, and MS-DOS file attributes (e.g., read-only, hidden, system, archive). It's particularly useful when dealing with legacy data or disk images where direct mounting of the MS-DOS filesystem might be impractical or undesirable, providing a non-intrusive way to inspect file metadata.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>minfo</b> primarily operates on MS-DOS file systems. It does not work directly with native Linux file systems. To function correctly, it often relies on the <I>mtools</I> configuration file (typically <I>/etc/mtools.conf</I> or <I>~/.mtools</I>) to define the MS-DOS devices or disk images to be accessed. Without proper configuration or the <I>-i</I> option, <b>minfo</b> might not find the specified MS-DOS file.


title: COMPARISON TO STAT COMMAND
content:
The command's functionality is somewhat analogous to the <I>stat</I> command for native Linux files, but specifically adapted for the nuances of the MS-DOS filesystem structure and attributes. While <I>stat</I> provides metadata for files on native Linux filesystems, <b>minfo</b> extracts similar but DOS-specific metadata from files within an MS-DOS image or partition.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>mtools</I> package, which includes <b>minfo</b>, has a long history dating back to the early days of Unix-like systems needing to interoperate with MS-DOS formatted media. It was developed to provide command-line utilities for accessing and manipulating MS-DOS filesystems without needing to mount them via the kernel's FAT filesystem driver. Its development was crucial before robust kernel-level FAT support became standard, allowing for easy transfer and management of files between DOS and Unix environments, particularly useful for floppy disk operations.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>up</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Brings up a Hyperledger Fabric network according to a specified profile.<br><br><b><b>down</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shuts down and cleans up a running Hyperledger Fabric network.<br><br><b><b>create</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a new channel on the network.<br><br><b><b>install</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Installs chaincode onto peers.<br><br><b><b>approve</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Approves a chaincode definition for an organization.<br><br><b><b>commit</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Commits a chaincode definition to a channel.<br><br><b><b>invoke</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Invokes a function on a deployed chaincode.<br><br><b><b>query</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Queries a function on a deployed chaincode.<br><br><b><b>profile</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages network profiles used by <I>minifab</I>.<br><br><b><b>version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the <I>minifab</I> and Fabric component versions.<br><br><b><b>-o <orderer_org></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the orderer organization to interact with (e.g., 'OrdererOrg').<br><br><b><b>-p <peer_org></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the peer organization to interact with (e.g., 'Org1MSP').<br><br><b><b>-n <chaincode_name></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the name of the chaincode for relevant operations.<br><br><b><b>-v <version></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the version of the chaincode or Fabric components.<br><br><b><b>-c <channel_name></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Identifies the channel for an operation.<br><br><b><b>-i <image_version></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Hyperledger Fabric Docker image tag to use.<br><br><b><b>--tls</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables TLS for network communication.<br><br><b><b>--sdk-go</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates Hyperledger Fabric Go SDK configuration.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>minifab</I> is a command-line tool designed to simplify the setup, deployment, and management of Hyperledger Fabric blockchain networks. It is particularly valuable for developers and testers who need to quickly spin up, configure, and tear down Fabric environments without delving into the complexities of manual configuration files and cryptographic material generation. <br><br>While not a standard Linux system command, <I>minifab</I> acts as an orchestration tool, abstracting away much of the manual effort involved in interacting with Fabric components like peers, orderers, and Certificate Authorities (CAs). It supports various operations, including network startup/shutdown, channel creation, chaincode deployment (install, approve, commit, invoke, query), and the management of organizations and identities. Its primary goal is to accelerate the development lifecycle by providing a concise and intuitive interface for Fabric network operations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>minifab</I> is not a standard Linux utility found in typical distributions. It is a specific tool developed within the Hyperledger Fabric ecosystem, primarily for development and testing purposes. It requires a specific setup, typically involving cloning the Fabric samples repository and having Docker and Docker Compose installed. While powerful for rapid prototyping, it is generally not recommended for production deployments, which require more robust and granular control over network configuration and security. Its behavior is highly dependent on the Hyperledger Fabric version and the profiles defined for network deployment.


title: INSTALLATION AND SETUP
content:
To use <I>minifab</I>, one typically needs to clone the Hyperledger Fabric samples repository (or a similar source) where the <I>minifab</I> script resides. Prerequisites usually include Docker and Docker Compose, as <I>minifab</I> orchestrates Fabric components as Docker containers. It is executed directly from its script location, often requiring execution permissions (e.g., <b>chmod +x minifab</b>).


title: USAGE CONTEXT
content:
<I>minifab</I> is primarily used for creating isolated, ephemeral blockchain networks on a local machine or a single server. It is ideal for:<br><ul><li>Rapidly testing chaincode logic.</li><li>Experimenting with different Fabric configurations.</li><li>Onboarding new developers to Hyperledger Fabric.</li><li>Demonstrating Fabric network capabilities without extensive setup.</li></ul>It automates tasks that would otherwise require deep knowledge of Fabric's underlying configuration files and command-line tools.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>minifab</I> emerged from the need to streamline the notoriously complex process of setting up Hyperledger Fabric networks for development and testing. Before tools like <I>minifab</I>, developers often had to manually configure Docker Compose files, generate cryptographic materials using <I>cryptogen</I>, and manage certificates with <I>configtxgen</I> and <I>fabric-ca</I>. This manual process was error-prone and time-consuming. <I>minifab</I> was developed to abstract these low-level operations, providing a higher-level, more intuitive command-line interface, thereby accelerating the developer's workflow and making Fabric more accessible for rapid prototyping and learning.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>minikube</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> [<i>&lt;flags&gt;</i>]<br><b>minikube</b> start [<i>&lt;flags&gt;</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--driver <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the VM driver or container runtime to use (e.g., <i>docker</i>, <i>virtualbox</i>, <i>kvm2</i>). The default is often chosen based on detected system capabilities.<br><br><b>--memory <i>&lt;amount&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the amount of RAM (in megabytes) allocated to the minikube VM (e.g., <i>4096mb</i>). A restart of minikube is required for changes to take effect.<br><br><b>--cpus <i>&lt;count&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the number of CPUs allocated to the minikube VM (e.g., <i>2</i>). Requires a minikube restart to apply changes.<br><br><b>--kubernetes-version <i>&lt;version&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the specific Kubernetes version to use (e.g., <i>v1.28.0</i>). Useful for testing applications against different Kubernetes releases.<br><br><b>--profile <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the name of the minikube profile. This allows running multiple independent minikube clusters concurrently on the same machine.<br><br><b>--container-runtime <i>&lt;runtime&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Determines the container runtime to be used within the Kubernetes cluster (e.g., <i>containerd</i>, <i>docker</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>minikube</i> is an open-source tool designed to simplify the process of running a single-node Kubernetes cluster directly on your personal computer. It accomplishes this by typically provisioning a lightweight virtual machine (VM) or a container (like Docker) on your local machine, within which a complete Kubernetes environment operates.<br><br>This setup provides a sandboxed, fully functional Kubernetes cluster ideal for local development, testing, and learning without the complexities of cloud-based or multi-node installations. <i>minikube</i> seamlessly integrates with the standard <i>kubectl</i> command-line tool, automatically configuring it to interact with the local cluster.<br><br>Key capabilities include support for various VM drivers and container runtimes (e.g., VirtualBox, KVM, Docker, Hyper-V), built-in management for common Kubernetes addons (like the Dashboard or Ingress controller), efficient local image caching, and the ability to mount host-path volumes, making it an essential utility for developers working with Kubernetes.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While highly convenient, <i>minikube</i> can be resource-intensive, requiring sufficient CPU and RAM, especially for demanding workloads or when running multiple profiles. It relies on an underlying hypervisor or container runtime, which must be correctly installed and configured. <i>minikube</i> is designed for local development and testing environments and is not suitable for production deployments. Users may occasionally encounter network configuration challenges that require manual troubleshooting of the underlying VM or container networking.


title: ADDON MANAGEMENT
content:
<i>minikube</i> features a robust addon manager that allows users to effortlessly enable or disable popular Kubernetes components, such as the Kubernetes Dashboard, Ingress controllers, container registries, and more. This significantly streamlines the process of integrating common development tools into the local cluster.<br>Example usage: <b>minikube addons enable dashboard</b>


title: KUBECTL INTEGRATION
content:
Upon successful startup, <i>minikube</i> automatically configures the local <i>kubectl</i> command-line tool to point to its cluster. It intelligently manages Kubernetes contexts, ensuring that subsequent <i>kubectl</i> commands are directed to the <i>minikube</i> cluster without requiring manual context switching by the user, providing a highly integrated experience.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed by Google, <i>minikube</i> was first released in 2016 to simplify the previously complex task of setting up a local Kubernetes development environment. Its initial goal was to provide a straightforward, consistent way for developers to run Kubernetes on their workstations. Over the years, it has continuously evolved, incorporating support for a wide range of drivers, newer Kubernetes versions, and essential features like addon management, solidifying its role as a fundamental tool in the Kubernetes ecosystem.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--driver</b> <i><name></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the virtualization driver to use (e.g., <i>docker</i>, <i>virtualbox</i>, <i>kvm2</i>, <i>hyperkit</i>, <i>podman</i>, <i>none</i>).<br><br><b><b>--memory</b> <i><amount></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Amount of RAM to allocate to the Minikube VM (e.g., <i>4096mb</i>, <i>4gb</i>).<br><br><b><b>--cpus</b> <i><count></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Number of CPUs to allocate to the Minikube VM.<br><br><b><b>--kubernetes-version</b> <i><version></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Kubernetes version to use for the cluster (e.g., <i>v1.28.3</i>).<br><br><b><b>--addons</b> <i><list></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables specific Minikube addons upon cluster creation or restart (e.g., <i>dashboard</i>, <i>ingress</i>, comma-separated for multiple).<br><br><b><b>--profile</b> <i><name></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Minikube profile to use. This allows running multiple independent Minikube clusters.<br><br><b><b>--disk-size</b> <i><size></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disk size to allocate to the Minikube VM (e.g., <i>20gb</i>).<br><br><b><b>--network-plugin</b> <i><name></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the CNI network plugin to use within the cluster.<br><br><b><b>--container-runtime</b> <i><runtime></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the container runtime to use (e.g., <i>containerd</i>, <i>docker</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>minikube start</b> command is fundamental to using Minikube, a tool that runs a single-node Kubernetes cluster locally on your machine. Its primary function is to initialize or restart your Minikube cluster, making a Kubernetes environment available for development and testing purposes.<br><br>When executed for the first time, <b>minikube start</b> downloads necessary components (like the Kubernetes image and a compatible Docker daemon) and configures the chosen virtualization driver (e.g., Docker, VirtualBox, KVM, HyperKit) to launch a virtual machine or container that hosts the Kubernetes control plane and node components. For subsequent runs, it quickly restarts the existing cluster.<br><br>This command is crucial for anyone looking to develop or test Kubernetes applications without needing a full-blown cloud-based cluster, providing a lightweight and isolated environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires a compatible virtualization environment (e.g., Docker Desktop, VirtualBox, KVM) to be installed and running on your system, depending on the chosen <b>--driver</b>. It can consume significant system resources (CPU, RAM, disk space) depending on the allocated values, which might impact overall system performance. Network configuration issues or conflicts with existing VPNs can sometimes prevent the cluster from starting correctly. Ensure your user has appropriate permissions for the chosen driver (e.g., Docker group membership for Docker driver, KVM permissions for KVM2 driver).


title: PREREQUISITES
content:
Before running <b>minikube start</b>, ensure you have a virtualization driver installed and configured (e.g., Docker Desktop, VirtualBox, KVM, HyperKit). It's also recommended to have <b>kubectl</b> installed and configured to interact with your cluster once it's started.


title: INTERACTION WITH KUBECTL
content:
Once Minikube has successfully started a cluster, it automatically configures your <b>kubectl</b> context to point to this new local cluster. You can then use standard <b>kubectl</b> commands (e.g., <b>kubectl get nodes</b>, <b>kubectl get pods --all-namespaces</b>) to interact with and manage your local Kubernetes environment.


title: HISTORY
content:
Minikube was initially developed by Google and later became a CNCF (Cloud Native Computing Foundation) project under Kubernetes SIGs (Special Interest Groups). It emerged as a solution to simplify local Kubernetes development, addressing the complexity of setting up and managing a full-fledged Kubernetes cluster. Its development has focused on providing a stable, easy-to-use, and highly configurable local Kubernetes environment, continually adapting to new virtualization technologies and Kubernetes versions.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>mkdocs</B> <I>&lt;command&gt;</I> <I>[options]</I> <I>[arguments]</I><br><br>Common commands include:<br><b>mkdocs build</b> <i>[options]</i><br><b>mkdocs serve</b> <i>[options]</i><br><b>mkdocs new</b> <i>&lt;directory&gt;</i><br><b>mkdocs gh-deploy</b> <i>[options]</i><br><b>mkdocs help</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>Global Options</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;These options can be used with most mkdocs commands.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Show program's version number and exit.</i><br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Show a help message for the command or subcommand and exit.</i><br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Suppress warnings during the operation.</i><br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Enable verbose output, showing more details about the process.</i><br><br><b>Options for <B>mkdocs build</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Options specific to building the documentation site.<br><br><b>-f FILE, --config-file FILE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify the path to the MkDocs configuration file. Defaults to <code>mkdocs.yml</code>.</i><br><br><b>-s DIR, --site-dir DIR</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The directory to output the built documentation to. Defaults to <code>site/</code>.</i><br><br><b>-c, --clean</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Remove any existing files in the output directory before building.</i><br><br><b>--strict</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Treat warnings as errors, causing the build to fail if any warnings occur.</i><br><br><b>--theme NAME</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The name of the theme to use for the documentation site (e.g., 'readthedocs', 'material').</i><br><br><b>--theme-dir DIR</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The path to a custom theme directory to use instead of a built-in one.</i><br><br><b>Options for <B>mkdocs serve</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Options specific to running the development server.<br><br><b>-a ADDR:PORT, --dev-addr ADDR:PORT</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The IP address and port to serve the documentation from. Defaults to <code>127.0.0.1:8000</code>.</i><br><br><b>-p PORT, --port PORT</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The port to serve documentation from. Overrides the port in <code>--dev-addr</code>.</i><br><br><b>--no-livereload</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Disable automatic reloading of the browser on file changes.</i><br><br><b>Arguments for <B>mkdocs new</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Argument required for creating a new MkDocs project.<br><br><b><directory></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The name of the directory where the new MkDocs project will be created.</i><br><br><b>Options for <B>mkdocs gh-deploy</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Options specific to deploying to GitHub Pages.<br><br><b>-m MESSAGE, --message MESSAGE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>A custom commit message to use when deploying to GitHub Pages.</i><br><br><b>-b BRANCH, --branch BRANCH</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The branch to deploy the documentation to on GitHub. Defaults to <code>gh-pages</code>.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
MkDocs is a fast, simple, and downright gorgeous static site generator geared towards building project documentation. It takes a set of Markdown files, specified in a YAML configuration file (<I>mkdocs.yml</I>), and transforms them into a professional-looking, navigable website.<br><br>Designed for ease of use, MkDocs allows developers to quickly create documentation with minimal setup, focusing on content rather than complex web development. It supports multiple themes, including the popular Material for MkDocs, and offers a robust plugin system for extended functionality like search, syntax highlighting, and PDF export.<br><br>The generated output is a collection of static HTML, CSS, and JavaScript files, which can be hosted on any web server, GitHub Pages, or cloud storage. This makes MkDocs an excellent choice for open-source projects, API documentation, internal company wikis, or any scenario requiring well-structured, easy-to-maintain documentation. Its live-reloading development server enhances productivity by showing changes in real-time as content is edited.


title: CAVEATS
content:
MkDocs requires Python 3.6 or higher to run. While it offers excellent static site generation, it is not a full-fledged content management system (CMS) and does not include database integration or dynamic content capabilities beyond what client-side JavaScript can provide. The site structure and navigation are primarily derived from the <code>mkdocs.yml</code> configuration and the file system structure of your Markdown files. Complex interactive features or user authentication would need to be implemented separately or through external services.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE (<B>MKDOCS.YML</B>)
content:
The heart of an MkDocs project is the <code>mkdocs.yml</code> configuration file. This YAML file defines the project's metadata, site navigation structure, theme settings, plugins, and more. It's where you specify the order of your pages, the title of your site, and various build options. Changes to this file typically require a rebuild or restart of the development server for them to take effect.


title: THEMES AND PLUGINS
content:
MkDocs supports a variety of themes, allowing you to customize the look and feel of your documentation. The default theme is quite minimal, but popular third-party themes like <I>Material for MkDocs</I> provide a rich and modern user experience. The plugin system allows for extending MkDocs' functionality, adding features like improved search, PDF export, multi-language support, or integration with external tools.


title: TYPICAL WORKFLOW
content:
A common workflow involves creating a new project with <B>mkdocs new</B>, then editing the Markdown content files and the <code>mkdocs.yml</code> configuration. During development, <B>mkdocs serve</B> is used to run a local web server with live-reloading. Once content is complete, <B>mkdocs build</B> generates the static site, which can then be deployed to a web server or GitHub Pages using <B>mkdocs gh-deploy</B>.


title: HISTORY
content:
MkDocs was first released in 2014, emerging from the Python ecosystem as a lightweight and developer-friendly tool for creating documentation. Its design philosophy centered on simplicity: allowing users to write documentation in Markdown and automatically generate a static website without needing extensive web development knowledge. Over the years, it has gained popularity, especially within open-source projects, due to its ease of use, active community, and extensible nature through themes and plugins. The development has continuously focused on improving build speed, adding new features, and maintaining compatibility with modern web standards, making it a reliable choice for documentation generation.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mke2fs</b> [<i>-t filesystem-type</i>] [<i>-b block-size</i>] [<i>-i bytes-per-inode</i>] [<i>-L volume-label</i>] [<i>-U UUID</i>] [<i>-j</i>] [<i>-O feature[,...]</i>] [<i>-c</i>] [<i>-F</i>] <i>device</i> [<i>blocks-count</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-t <filesystem-type></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the filesystem type to be created. Common types are <b>ext2</b>, <b>ext3</b>, and <b>ext4</b>. If not specified, <b>ext4</b> is often the default on modern systems.<br><br><b>-b <block-size></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the size of blocks in bytes. Valid sizes are 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes. Larger block sizes can reduce fragmentation but may waste space for very small files.<br><br><b>-i <bytes-per-inode-ratio></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the ratio of bytes of space per inode. This value determines the number of inodes created. A smaller ratio (e.g., 1024) means more inodes, suitable for systems with many small files.<br><br><b>-L <volume-label></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the volume label for the filesystem. This label can be used to identify the filesystem when mounting or in <b>/etc/fstab</b>.<br><br><b>-U <UUID></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the universally unique identifier (UUID) for the filesystem. If not specified, a random UUID is generated.<br><br><b>-j</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates an <b>ext3</b> filesystem with a journal. This option is effectively a shorthand for <b>-t ext3</b>.<br><br><b>-O <feature[,...]></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables or disables specific filesystem features. Features can be added (e.g., <b>-O dir_index</b>) or removed (e.g., <b>-O ^has_journal</b>). Many features are enabled by default for <b>ext4</b>.<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks the device for bad blocks before creating the filesystem. This can be time-consuming, especially for large devices.<br><br><b>-F</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces <b>mke2fs</b> to proceed even if the specified <i>device</i> is not a block special device or if it is mounted. Use with extreme caution as it can lead to data loss.<br><br><b>-N <number-of-inodes></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overrides the default number of inodes to be created. This can be useful for specific use cases where the default calculation is not optimal.<br><br><b>-m <reserved-blocks-percentage></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the percentage of blocks reserved for the superuser (root). Default is 5%, often reduced to 0-1% for data partitions.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing more details about the filesystem creation process.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables quiet mode, suppressing most output during filesystem creation.<br><br><b>device</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The block device or file that will contain the filesystem (e.g., <b>/dev/sdb1</b> or <b>/path/to/image.img</b>).<br><br><b>blocks-count</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The number of blocks on the device. If omitted, <b>mke2fs</b> automatically determines the size of the device.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>mke2fs</b> is a powerful utility used to create <b>ext2</b>, <b>ext3</b>, and <b>ext4</b> filesystems on a specified block device, such as a disk partition or a file-backed loop device. It is a fundamental tool for preparing storage for use in Linux systems.<br><br>When executed, <b>mke2fs</b> initializes the filesystem's structure, including the superblock, inode tables, data blocks, and block groups. For <b>ext3</b> and <b>ext4</b> filesystems, it also sets up a journal, which helps ensure data consistency and faster recovery after system crashes. The command overwrites any existing data on the target device, making it a destructive operation.<br><br>Users can customize various filesystem parameters like block size, bytes-per-inode ratio, volume label, and specific <b>ext</b> features, allowing for optimization based on the intended use case, such as large file storage or a high number of small files. <b>mke2fs</b> is an essential component of the <i>e2fsprogs</i> suite, which provides tools for managing <b>ext</b>-family filesystems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>mke2fs</b> is a <i>destructive</i> command. It will erase all existing data on the specified device. Always double-check the <i>device</i> argument to ensure you are formatting the correct partition or disk.<br><br>While <b>mke2fs</b> creates different <b>ext</b> filesystem versions (<b>ext2</b>, <b>ext3</b>, <b>ext4</b>), it does not convert an existing filesystem in place. For converting <b>ext2</b> to <b>ext3</b> (adding a journal) or <b>ext3</b> to <b>ext4</b> (enabling new features), use <b>tune2fs</b>.<br><br>Incorrect choices for parameters like block size or bytes-per-inode ratio can lead to inefficient space utilization or premature inode exhaustion for specific workloads.


title: DEFAULT BEHAVIOR AND SMART DEFAULTS
content:
Without specific options, <b>mke2fs</b> intelligently determines optimal parameters based on the size of the device and the kernel's capabilities. For instance, on modern systems, it often defaults to creating an <b>ext4</b> filesystem with appropriate block and inode sizes, aiming for a balance between performance and storage efficiency.


title: THE E2FSPROGS SUITE
content:
<b>mke2fs</b> is part of the comprehensive <i>e2fsprogs</i> user-space utilities, which are essential for managing <b>ext2</b>, <b>ext3</b>, and <b>ext4</b> filesystems. This suite also includes tools for checking (<b>e2fsck</b>), tuning (<b>tune2fs</b>), dumping information (<b>dumpe2fs</b>), and recovering (<b>e2restore</b>) these filesystems.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>mke2fs</b> is a core utility of the <i>e2fsprogs</i> package, originally developed by <i>Theodore Ts'o</i> for the <i>Ext2 filesystem</i>. As Linux evolved, so did its primary filesystem. <b>mke2fs</b> was updated to support <i>Ext3</i> with the introduction of journaling, providing improved data integrity and faster crash recovery.<br><br>Later, support for <i>Ext4</i> was added, incorporating features like extents (for better handling of large files), delayed allocation, and larger filesystem sizes. This continuous development reflects its central role in Linux disk management, adapting to modern storage requirements and performance optimizations.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>DIRECTORY</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The source directory whose contents will be packed into the Cramfs image.<br><br><b><i>OUTPUT_FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the output Cramfs image file or device.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display help information and exit.<br><br><b><b>-b</b> <i><size></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the block size in bytes. The default is 4096 (4KB). Must be a power of 2.<br><br><b><b>-e</b> <i><edition></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the edition number for the filesystem header. This is an arbitrary number.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i><file></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Inject a file as the root inode. This is typically used for specialized boot scenarios.<br><br><b><b>-n</b> <i><name></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the filesystem name displayed in the header. The maximum length is 16 characters.<br><br><b><b>-p</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Pad the filesystem to a page boundary (4KB). This can improve performance on some hardware.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort directory entries to ensure a consistent image build, which can be useful for reproducible builds.<br><br><b><b>-z</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force zlib compression (this is the default and only supported compression method for Cramfs).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mkfs.cramfs</b> command is a utility used to create a Cramfs (Compressed ROM File System) image from a given directory structure. Cramfs is a simple, highly compressed, and read-only filesystem designed primarily for embedded systems and other applications where space efficiency is paramount. <br><br>It achieves its small footprint by compressing individual files using zlib and by having a very lightweight metadata structure. Unlike typical filesystems, Cramfs does not support writing, in-place updates, or advanced features like file permissions (beyond basic read/execute) or modification timestamps for individual files. Once created, the Cramfs image can be mounted as a read-only filesystem, making it suitable for firmware, initial ramdisks (initramfs/initrd), or read-only partitions on devices where data integrity and compactness are critical.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Cramfs is a <i>read-only</i> filesystem; data cannot be written to or modified on a mounted Cramfs image. It lacks support for common filesystem features like hard links, symbolic links with absolute paths (relative paths are supported), and robust file permissions (it stores only basic read/execute bits). Timestamp information for individual files is also limited. Due to these limitations and the emergence of more advanced compressed filesystems like Squashfs, Cramfs is less commonly used for general purposes today, primarily finding niches in legacy embedded systems.


title: FILESYSTEM STRUCTURE
content:
A Cramfs image consists of a header, followed by metadata and compressed file data. The header contains basic information like the filesystem size, name, and a checksum. Files are stored individually compressed using zlib, and directories are stored as simple lists of filenames and their inode numbers.


title: TYPICAL USE CASES
content:
Beyond embedded devices, Cramfs was also used for bootable CDs/DVDs (like early Linux live distributions) where a read-only, compressed filesystem was beneficial for fitting the OS into a smaller space. However, for most modern live systems and embedded applications, Squashfs is now the preferred choice due to its superior features and performance.


title: HISTORY
content:
Cramfs (Compressed ROM File System) was developed by Linus Torvalds and others for the Linux kernel, with initial patches appearing around 1999. Its design was driven by the need for a simple, compact, and efficient read-only filesystem suitable for embedded devices with limited memory and storage, particularly those relying on ROM or flash memory. It became a popular choice for initial ramdisks (initrd) and root filesystems in early embedded Linux distributions. While still supported, its usage has declined over time in favor of more modern and feature-rich compressed filesystems like Squashfs, which offer better compression ratios, more robust features, and active development.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-b <I>block-size</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify the size of blocks in bytes (e.g., 1024, 2048, 4096). Default is 4096 bytes.</I><br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Check the device for bad blocks before creating the filesystem, using a read-only test.</I><br><br><b>-L <I>volume-label</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Set the filesystem volume label (e.g., MY_DATA). This label can be used to mount the filesystem.</I><br><br><b>-N <I>number-of-inodes</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Override the default number of inodes to create. Inodes store metadata about files and directories.</I><br><br><b>-O <I>feature[,...]</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Enable or disable specific ext4 filesystem features. Multiple features can be separated by commas.</I><br><br><b>-E <I>extended-option[,...]</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Set extended filesystem options, such as 'stride' (RAID chunk size) or 'stripe-width' (RAID stripe size).</I><br><br><b>-F</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Force the creation of the filesystem, even if a valid filesystem or an existing partition table is detected on the device.</I><br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Execute quietly, suppressing most output messages during filesystem creation.</I><br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Produce verbose output, showing more details about the filesystem creation process.</I><br><br><b>-U <I>UUID</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Set the Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) for the filesystem. A new UUID is generated by default.</I><br><br><b><I>device</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>The special file representing the device (e.g., /dev/sdb1, /dev/mapper/my_volume) where the filesystem will be created.</I><br><br><b><I>blocks-count</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>The number of blocks on the device to be used for the filesystem. If omitted, the entire device or partition will be used.</I><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<br>The <b>mkfs.ext4</b> command is used to build an ext4 filesystem on a designated storage device, such as a disk partition or a logical volume. It initializes the necessary on-disk structures, including the superblock, inode tables, and data blocks, which are fundamental for the filesystem's operation.<br><br>As the default and highly recommended filesystem for many Linux distributions, ext4 provides significant advancements over its predecessors, ext2 and ext3. These enhancements include support for larger file and volume sizes, improved performance, and enhanced data integrity through robust journaling. This command is essential for preparing new or existing storage devices for use, enabling the operating system to store and retrieve data efficiently and reliably.<br><br>When executed, <b>mkfs.ext4</b> will erase all existing data on the target device, making it a powerful yet potentially destructive utility. Users must exercise extreme caution and verify the correct device path before proceeding with execution.<br>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<br>Using <b>mkfs.ext4</b> is a destructive operation; it will <I>erase all existing data</I> on the specified device. Always double-check the device path before executing the command to prevent accidental data loss. This command typically requires root privileges to execute successfully. Creating a filesystem on a device that is currently mounted can lead to severe data corruption and system instability.<br>


title: DEFAULT BEHAVIOR
content:
<br>By default, <b>mkfs.ext4</b> creates a journaled filesystem, which is a core feature of ext4 ensuring data integrity in case of unexpected shutdowns. It intelligently optimizes the filesystem layout based on the device size and provides sensible defaults for inode density and block size if not explicitly specified. It also automatically enables crucial ext4 features like <i>dir_index</i>, <i>filetype</i>, <i>has_journal</i>, and <i>extent</i>, which are fundamental to ext4's performance, scalability, and capabilities.<br>


title: USAGE EXAMPLE
content:
<br>To create an ext4 filesystem on partition <I>/dev/sdb1</I> with a label 'MY_DATA':<br><br><code><b>sudo mkfs.ext4 -L MY_DATA /dev/sdb1</b></code><br><br>To force creation on <I>/dev/sdc2</I> and check for bad blocks:<br><br><code><b>sudo mkfs.ext4 -F -c /dev/sdc2</b></code><br>


title: HISTORY
content:
<br><b>mkfs.ext4</b> is part of the <b>e2fsprogs</b> suite of utilities, which are designed for managing ext2, ext3, and ext4 filesystems. It acts as a specialized front-end wrapper to the more generic <b>mke2fs</b> command, automatically configuring the necessary options to create an ext4 filesystem.<br><br>The ext4 filesystem itself was introduced as a significant evolution from ext3, making its debut in the Linux kernel 2.6.19 in 2006 and achieving stable status in version 2.6.28 in 2008. <b>mkfs.ext4</b> was developed in conjunction with ext4 to specifically handle its new features, such as extents (for improved large file handling), larger timestamps, and persistent pre-allocation.<br>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>device</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the block device or partition to be formatted (e.g., <i>/dev/sdb1</i>).<br><br><b><i>size</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optional. The size of the filesystem in 512-byte blocks. If omitted, the entire device will be used.<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--fast</b>, <b>--quick</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a quick format. This only overwrites the metadata, leaving the actual data blocks untouched. It is much faster than a full format.<br><br><b><b>-L</b> <i>VOLUME_LABEL</i>, <b>--label</b> <i>VOLUME_LABEL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the volume label for the new NTFS filesystem. The label can contain spaces if enclosed in quotes.<br><br><b><b>-C</b> <i>BYTES</i>, <b>--cluster-size</b> <i>BYTES</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the allocation unit (cluster) size in bytes. Common values include <i>512</i>, <i>1024</i>, <i>2048</i>, <i>4096</i> (4K), <i>8192</i> (8K), etc. The default is typically 4096 bytes.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--compress</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables default compression for files on the new filesystem. Note: NTFS compression might not be fully supported or performant when accessed from Linux.<br><br><b><b>-Q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses all output messages, making the command run silently.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays more verbose output during the formatting process, showing detailed information about the filesystem creation.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the <i>mkfs.ntfs</i> utility.<br><br><b><b>-U</b> <i>UUID</i>, <b>--uuid</b> <i>UUID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) for the new filesystem. If not specified, a new UUID will be generated automatically.<br><br><b><b>-F</b>, <b>--force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the creation of the filesystem even if a filesystem is already detected on the device, or if the device is mounted. Use with extreme caution.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available options and their descriptions.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mkfs.ntfs</i> is a crucial utility for formatting a block device (e.g., a hard drive partition) with the New Technology File System (NTFS), the primary filesystem used by Microsoft Windows. It's part of the <b>ntfsprogs</b> (or <b>ntfs-3g</b>) suite, which provides robust read/write support for NTFS volumes on Linux. <br><br>This command prepares a designated storage area for data by creating the necessary filesystem structures, such as the Master File Table (MFT), allocation units (clusters), and other metadata. It supports various options to customize the filesystem, including setting the volume label, specifying cluster size, and performing quick formats. After formatting, the device can be mounted and used to store data, ensuring compatibility with Windows operating systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b><i>DANGER:</i></b> Using <i>mkfs.ntfs</i> will <b>permanently destroy all existing data</b> on the specified <i>device</i>. Always double-check the device path (e.g., <i>/dev/sdb1</i>) before execution to prevent accidental data loss.<br><br>Administrative/root privileges are required to run this command. Ensure the target device is unmounted before attempting to format it to prevent errors and potential data corruption. Features like NTFS compression and encryption created with Windows might not be fully supported or performant when accessed from Linux.


title: PART OF <B>NTFSPROGS</B> / <B>NTFS-3G</B>
content:
<i>mkfs.ntfs</i> is an integral part of the <b>ntfsprogs</b> (and subsequently, <b>ntfs-3g</b>) package, a collection of command-line tools that provide full read and write access to NTFS filesystems on non-Windows operating systems, making it a cornerstone for Windows-Linux interoperability.


title: CLUSTER SIZE CONSIDERATIONS
content:
The choice of cluster size (<i>-C</i> option) can significantly impact performance and storage efficiency. Smaller cluster sizes are more efficient for storing many small files, as they reduce 'slack space'. Larger cluster sizes can improve performance for very large files by reducing the number of disk operations. The default 4KB is a good balance for most general uses.


title: TYPICAL USAGE WORKFLOW
content:
This command is typically used after partitioning a new or existing disk using tools like <i>fdisk</i> or <i>parted</i>. Once a partition is created (e.g., <i>/dev/sdb1</i>), <i>mkfs.ntfs</i> is then used to format that specific partition, preparing it for data storage that can be natively read and written by Windows systems.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>mkfs.ntfs</i> emerged as a crucial component of the <b>ntfsprogs</b> project, which later became deeply integrated with the <b>ntfs-3g</b> project. Its development was driven by the need to provide robust and comprehensive read/write support for NTFS filesystems on Linux and other Unix-like operating systems. <br><br>Prior to its existence, creating or reliably managing NTFS volumes on Linux was challenging. <i>ntfs-3g</i>, and by extension <i>mkfs.ntfs</i>, filled this critical gap, enabling seamless interoperability between Linux and Windows environments by allowing Linux users to format and manage NTFS volumes directly.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
mkgroup [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>GROUPNAME</i><br>or<br>mkgroup [ -g <i>GID</i> ] [ -r ] <i>GROUPNAME</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>GROUPNAME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The name of the new group to be created. This name should be unique and follow system naming conventions (typically alphanumeric, no spaces, usually 1 to 32 characters).<br><br><b>-g <i>GID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the numeric Group ID (GID) for the new group. If this option is omitted, the system typically assigns the next available GID automatically from a defined range.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a system group. System groups are typically used for system accounts and are assigned GIDs from a reserved lower range (e.g., below 1000).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Groups are a fundamental concept in Linux for managing file permissions and user access. The conceptual command <b>mkgroup</b> is designed to create a new group entry on the system, allowing administrators to organize users into logical collections for permission management.<br><br><i><b>Crucial Point:</b> On most modern Linux distributions (e.g., Debian, Ubuntu, RHEL, Fedora, Arch Linux), the standard command to add a new group is not <b>mkgroup</b> but rather <b>groupadd</b>. <b>mkgroup</b> might be found on older Unix systems or specific proprietary distributions like SCO OpenServer. This analysis describes its conceptual role and typical functionalities if it were a standard Linux utility, mirroring what <b>groupadd</b> provides.</i><br><br>When executed, <b>mkgroup</b> conceptually performs several actions:<br>It creates a new entry in the <i>/etc/group</i> file, which stores group names and their respective Group IDs (GIDs).<br>If shadow passwords are in use, it also creates an entry in the <i>/etc/gshadow</i> file for password protection and administration information associated with the group.<br>It typically assigns a unique GID to the new group, either automatically from an available range or based on a specified GID.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The primary caveat is that <b>mkgroup</b> is <i>not</i> a standard command on most contemporary Linux distributions. Users should use the <b>groupadd</b> command instead, which provides equivalent and often more extensive functionalities.<br><br>Creating groups requires superuser privileges (root access or via <b>sudo</b>). Improper use, such as assigning duplicate GIDs, can lead to system instability or security issues.<br><br>Directly editing the <i>/etc/group</i> or <i>/etc/gshadow</i> files is strongly discouraged as it can lead to file corruption or inconsistencies.


title: PERMISSIONS REQUIRED
content:
Only the root user or a user with <b>sudo</b> privileges can execute <b>mkgroup</b> (or <b>groupadd</b>) to create new groups. This is a security measure to prevent unauthorized changes to system group configurations.


title: FILES MODIFIED
content:
The command typically modifies the <i>/etc/group</i> file, which lists all system groups and their members. If shadow passwords are enabled, it also updates the <i>/etc/gshadow</i> file, which stores encrypted group passwords and group administration information.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of a 'make group' command, often named <b>mkgroup</b>, was more common in older Unix variants, such as SCO Unix, Xenix, and some proprietary systems. These systems often had commands like <b>mkuser</b>, <b>mkgroup</b>, etc., that directly reflected their action.<br><br>With the rise of Linux and the standardization of system administration tools, a more consistent naming convention emerged. Commands like <b>groupadd</b>, <b>groupdel</b>, and <b>groupmod</b> (and their user counterparts: <b>useradd</b>, <b>userdel</b>, <b>usermod</b>) became the standard across major Linux distributions. This shift provided a more unified and extensible interface for managing users and groups, leading to the deprecation or absence of <b>mkgroup</b> in modern Linux environments.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-o <I>OUTFILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the path and filename for the output initramfs image. If not specified, a default location (e.g., /boot/initramfs-<I>VERSION</I>.img) is often used.<br><br><b><I>KERNEL_VERSION</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The specific kernel version for which to build the initramfs image. If omitted, the currently running kernel's version is typically used.<br><br><b>-c <I>CONFIG_FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use an alternate configuration file for specifying modules, hooks, and other options.<br><br><b>-m <I>MODULES</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly include a comma-separated list of kernel modules in the image. Useful for drivers not auto-detected.<br><br><b>-d <I>DIRECTORY</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add a specified directory and its contents to the initramfs image.<br><br><b>-H <I>HOOK_SCRIPT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include a custom hook script to be executed during the initramfs boot process.<br><br><b>-r <I>ROOT_DEVICE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the root device to be used by the initramfs, e.g., /dev/sda1 or UUID.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output, showing the steps and files being included in the image.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate quietly, suppressing non-essential output.<br><br><b>-f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force overwrite of an existing output file without prompting.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mkinitfs</b> command is a utility used to create an <I>initramfs</I> (initial RAM filesystem) image. This image is a compressed CPIO archive that is loaded by the bootloader (like GRUB or LILO) into RAM before the actual root filesystem is mounted. Its primary purpose is to provide the necessary kernel modules, utilities, and scripts (especially an <I>init</I> script) to handle the early boot process, including tasks such as detecting hardware, loading crucial drivers (e.g., for disk controllers, NVMe, USB), configuring logical volume managers (LVM), software RAID, or decrypting encrypted root filesystems. Without a correctly configured <I>initramfs</I>, the Linux kernel might not be able to locate and mount the root filesystem, leading to a boot failure. <br><br>While <I>mkinitfs</I> is a generic name, specific distributions often provide their own wrappers or more advanced tools like <I>update-initramfs</I> (Debian/Ubuntu), <I>dracut</I> (Red Hat/Fedora), or <I>mkinitcpio</I> (Arch Linux) to manage the creation of these images, simplifying the process for users.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The exact behavior and available options for <I>mkinitfs</I> can vary significantly between Linux distributions, as many provide their own specialized implementations or wrapper scripts. Incorrectly configured <I>initramfs</I> images can lead to an unbootable system. Always back up existing <I>initramfs</I> images before making changes, and test new images in a safe environment if possible. Advanced configurations often require a deep understanding of kernel modules, device drivers, and the Linux boot process.


title: PURPOSE IN BOOT PROCESS
content:
The <I>initramfs</I> is crucial for bridging the gap between the kernel's initial loading and the mounting of the actual root filesystem. It contains the minimal set of binaries and libraries needed to perform early boot tasks that the kernel itself cannot handle natively, such as handling LVM volumes, encrypted disks (LUKS), software RAID arrays, or specific network boot configurations (like NFS root). After these tasks are completed, the <I>initramfs</I> pivots root to the real filesystem, and the normal boot process continues.


title: CUSTOMIZATION AND HOOKS
content:
Advanced users can customize the <I>initramfs</I> by adding custom scripts (known as 'hooks'), additional binaries, or specific kernel modules. These hooks allow for complex pre-root mount operations, such as prompting for passphrases for encrypted volumes, configuring network interfaces for network-booted systems, or running diagnostic checks. The exact mechanism for customization depends on the specific <I>initramfs</I> generation tool being used (e.g., hooks in <I>dracut</I> or <I>mkinitcpio</I>).


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of an initial RAM disk (<I>initrd</I>) was introduced in Linux kernel 2.0. Initially, <I>initrd</I> images were block devices containing a small filesystem, which required a loop device to be mounted. This approach was largely superseded by the <I>initramfs</I> model with Linux kernel 2.6. <I>initramfs</I> is a cpio archive (often gzipped) that is directly unpacked into a tmpfs (RAM-based filesystem) by the kernel. This change simplified the architecture by eliminating the need for a separate filesystem and loopback mounting. <br><br>While <I>mkinitrd</I> was the common tool for creating <I>initrd</I> images, <I>mkinitfs</I> (or tools like <I>mkinitramfs</I>, <I>dracut</I>, <I>update-initramfs</I>) emerged to manage the more flexible and powerful <I>initramfs</I> images. These tools abstract away the complexities of selecting necessary modules, integrating hooks, and packaging the final archive, making the process more robust and user-friendly across diverse hardware configurations.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mkosi</b> [<i>OPTIONS...</i>] [<i>COMMAND</i>]<br><i>Common commands:</i><br><b>mkosi build</b>: Builds the operating system image.<br><b>mkosi clean</b>: Cleans up build artifacts.<br><b>mkosi shell</b>: Spawns an interactive shell inside the build environment.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--distribution=<i>NAME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the base distribution (e.g., <i>fedora</i>, <i>debian</i>) for the image.<br><br><b>--size=<i>SIZE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the final image size (e.g., <i>5G</i> for 5 Gigabytes, <i>100M</i> for 100 Megabytes).<br><br><b>--format=<i>FORMAT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Choose the output image format (e.g., <i>raw</i>, <i>qcow2</i>, <i>tar</i>, <i>directory</i>).<br><br><b>--output=<i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Define the name and path for the generated image file.<br><br><b>--kernel</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include a Linux kernel in the created image.<br><br><b>--extra-packages=<i>PKGS</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Install additional space-separated packages into the image.<br><br><b>--ssh</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable the SSH daemon in the image and optionally create a user for SSH access.<br><br><b>--qemu-user-static</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable QEMU user-mode emulation binaries for cross-architecture builds.<br><br><b>--config-file=<i>PATH</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative <i>mkosi.conf</i> file to use instead of the default.<br><br><b>--force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overwrite existing image files without prompting for confirmation.<br><br><b>--debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose debugging output during the build process for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>--shell</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run an interactive shell within the build environment instead of proceeding with the full build.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mkosi</i> (Make Operating System Image) is a powerful and versatile script designed for creating reproducible operating system images. It automates the process of building various types of images, including raw disk images, QCOW2 virtual disk images, and tarball root file systems. <i>mkosi</i> supports a wide range of Linux distributions like Fedora, Debian, Arch Linux, and openSUSE.<br><br>A core strength of <i>mkosi</i> lies in its use of <i>systemd-nspawn</i> containers, which provide an isolated and consistent build environment. This isolation ensures that the build process is not affected by the host system's configuration, leading to highly reproducible images. Users define the image's properties, such as included packages, services, kernel, and custom scripts, through a declarative <i>mkosi.conf</i> file.<br><br><i>mkosi</i> is particularly useful for developers needing consistent test environments, for creating appliance images, or for deploying custom systems. Its focus on reproducibility and integration with modern Linux tooling makes it a valuable asset for modern system development and deployment workflows. It simplifies what traditionally can be a complex and error-prone process.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>mkosi</i> typically requires <b>root privileges</b> for operations involving image creation and <i>systemd-nspawn</i> container management. Builds can consume significant disk space and network bandwidth, especially when downloading base images and packages for the first time. The tool is tightly integrated with <i>systemd</i> components, making it most effective in <i>systemd</i>-centric environments.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE (<I>MKOSI.CONF</I>)
content:
The primary method for configuring <i>mkosi</i> builds. This declarative file specifies the distribution, packages, services, kernel, boot loader, user accounts, and custom scripts (e.g., <i>mkosi.postinst</i>, <i>mkosi.clean</i>) to be included in the image. Its flexibility allows for highly customized image creation.


title: REPRODUCIBILITY AND DETERMINISM
content:
<i>mkosi</i> is designed with reproducibility in mind. By isolating the build environment using <i>systemd-nspawn</i> and specifying dependencies declaratively, it aims to produce identical images from the same input configuration, which is critical for consistent deployments and debugging.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>mkosi</i> emerged from the <i>systemd</i> project, primarily developed by Lennart Poettering and collaborators, to address the need for a simple, reproducible, and robust way to create operating system images. Its development leveraged <i>systemd-nspawn</i>'s capabilities, allowing for secure and isolated build environments. It gained prominence as a convenient tool for <i>systemd</i> developers and users for crafting consistent development, testing, and deployment images.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I>mmount</I> [-a] [-D <I>drive</I>:<I>path</I>] [-F <I>file</I>] [-o <I>option</I>] [<I>mountpoint</I>] [<I>drive</I>:]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to "mount" all drives defined in the <I>mtools</I> configuration file automatically.<br><br><b><b>-D <I>drive</I>:<I>path</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines a temporary DOS drive mapping. Associates a DOS drive letter (e.g., <I>A:</I>) with a Linux device file or directory (e.g., <I>/dev/fd0</I>). This mapping overrides any existing mapping for the duration of the command.<br><br><b><b>-F <I>file</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative <I>mtools</I> configuration file to use, overriding the default <I>~/.mtoolsrc</I> or <I>/etc/mtools.conf</I>.<br><br><b><b>-o <I>option</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes specific <I>mtools</I> configuration options (e.g., <I>fat_access=rw</I>), which can override settings from the configuration file.<br><br><b><b><I>mountpoint</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The directory where <I>mmount</I> should operate as if the DOS filesystem is "mounted". This often corresponds to a device defined in <I>mtools.conf</I>.<br><br><b><b><I>drive:</I></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The specific DOS drive letter (e.g., <I>A:</I>, <I>C:</I>) to be "mounted" or configured for <I>mtools</I> operations.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>mmount</b></i> is a utility from the <I>mtools</I> suite, designed to facilitate interaction with MS-DOS formatted filesystems from a Linux environment. Unlike the standard <I>mount(8)</I> command, <I>mmount</I> does not perform a true kernel-level mount operation. Instead, it configures the <I>mtools</I> environment, making it appear as if a DOS filesystem is mounted and accessible to other <I>mtools</I> utilities like <I>mcopy</I> or <I>mdir</I>.<br><br>Its primary purpose is to simplify access to legacy media such as floppy disks or disk images containing DOS filesystems. It allows users to define temporary drive mappings and specify configuration options, effectively setting up a working context for subsequent <I>mtools</I> operations without requiring root privileges for a full system mount. This makes it particularly useful for handling older DOS media or when a full kernel mount is unnecessary or undesirable.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b><I>mmount</I></b> does <I>not</I> perform a true kernel-level filesystem mount. It is a utility from the <I>mtools</I> suite that configures the environment for other <I>mtools</I> commands to access DOS filesystems. Consequently, filesystems handled by <I>mmount</I> will <I>not</I> appear in the output of standard Linux commands like <I>df</I> or <I>mount</I>.<br><br>It is primarily designed for MS-DOS formatted media (such as floppy disks or older disk images) and may not fully support modern FAT32 features or other filesystems like NTFS or ext4. Access permissions and certain filesystem operations might behave differently compared to native Linux mounts. The <I>mtools</I> package must be installed on the system for <I>mmount</I> to be available and functional.


title: <B>CONFIGURATION DEPENDENCY</B>
content:
<I>mmount</I> heavily relies on the <I>mtools</I> configuration file (typically <I>~/.mtoolsrc</I> in the user's home directory or <I>/etc/mtools.conf</I> system-wide). This file defines the permanent drive mappings (e.g., <I>A:</I> to <I>/dev/fd0</I>) and default access permissions. Without proper configuration in these files, <I>mmount</I> might not be able to locate or operate on the intended DOS devices. The command-line options like <I>-D</I> and <I>-F</I> can temporarily override or specify alternative configuration sources.


title: <B>EMULATED MOUNT</B>
content:
It is critical to understand that <I>mmount</I> creates an <I>emulated</I> mount environment for <I>mtools</I> utilities, rather than a true filesystem mount registered with the Linux kernel. This means that standard Linux commands like <I>ls</I>, <I>cp</I>, or <I>cat</I> cannot directly access files through the "mountpoint" established by <I>mmount</I>. Instead, you must use their <I>mtools</I> counterparts, such as <I>mdir</I>, <I>mcopy</I>, or <I>mtype</I>, respectively, to interact with the DOS filesystem.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>mtools</I> suite, which includes <I>mmount</I>, emerged in the early days of Linux to provide robust and convenient tools for interacting with MS-DOS filesystems. During a time when DOS was prevalent and Linux kernel support for DOS filesystems was less mature or less user-friendly, <I>mtools</I> offered a crucial bridge. It allowed users to access and manipulate files on DOS-formatted floppy disks or hard drives without needing root privileges for every mount/unmount cycle, streamlining workflows for dual-boot systems or systems frequently handling DOS media. While its necessity has diminished with the decline of floppy drives and the maturation of kernel-level FAT support, <I>mtools</I> (and <I>mmount</I>) remains a valuable tool for specific niche applications, such as data recovery from legacy media or embedded systems interactions.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
As 'mods' is <i>not</i> a standard Linux command, there is no universal synopsis. Its usage would depend entirely on its definition as a custom alias, script, or its implicit reference to kernel module management tools. For kernel module management, refer to the synopsis of commands like <i>modprobe(8)</i>, <i>lsmod(8)</i>, or <i>modinfo(8)</i>.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The term 'mods' (short for modifications or modules) is <i>not</i> a recognized standard standalone command in Linux distributions. It is highly likely that if you encounter 'mods' in a Linux context, it refers to one of the following:<br><br><b>1. Kernel Modules:</b> In this common scenario, 'mods' is an abbreviation or a colloquial term referring to Linux kernel modules. Kernel modules are pieces of code that can be loaded and unloaded into the kernel upon demand. They extend the kernel's functionality without requiring a system reboot. Commands like <i>lsmod</i>, <i>modprobe</i>, <i>insmod</i>, and <i>rmmod</i> are used to manage these modules.<br><br><b>2. User-Defined Alias or Script:</b> 'mods' could be a custom alias or a script defined by a user or system administrator for a specific task. This is common practice in shell scripting to simplify complex commands or automate workflows.<br><br><b>3. Application-Specific Terminology:</b> In some specific applications or gaming contexts, 'mods' refers to user-created modifications to software. However, this is outside the scope of general-purpose Linux command-line utilities. <br><br>Therefore, to understand its specific function, one would need to investigate the context in which 'mods' is used, as it does not have a universal definition as a Linux command.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The most significant caveat is that 'mods' is <i>not</i> a standard, universally recognized Linux command. Relying on 'mods' without understanding its specific definition in a given environment can lead to confusion or errors. Its behavior will vary greatly, if it exists at all, depending on whether it's a custom script, an alias, or merely a colloquial term for kernel modules.


title: UNDERSTANDING CONTEXT
content:
Given that 'mods' is not a standard command, its meaning is entirely context-dependent. Always verify the command's actual definition (e.g., by checking <i>alias mods</i>, <i>type mods</i>, or examining shell scripts) if you encounter it in a specific Linux environment.


title: KERNEL MODULE DIRECTORIES
content:
Kernel modules are typically located in <i>/lib/modules/$(uname -r)/</i>, where <i>$(uname -r)</i> represents the kernel release version. These directories contain the compiled module files (often with a <i>.ko</i> extension).


title: HISTORY
content:
As 'mods' is <i>not</i> a standard Linux command, it does not possess a documented development history. The concept it *might* refer to, kernel module management, has been an integral part of the Linux kernel since its early days, allowing for dynamic loading and unloading of device drivers and other kernel extensions. Tools like <i>modprobe</i> and <i>insmod</i> have evolved over time to provide robust and flexible module management capabilities, adapting to changes in kernel architecture and module dependencies.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--dbpath</b> <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the directory where <b>mongod</b> stores its data files. This is a critical option for defining where your database resides.<br><br><b><b>--port</b> <i>&lt;num&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the port number on which <b>mongod</b> listens for client connections. The default MongoDB port is 27017.<br><br><b><b>--bind_ip</b> <i>&lt;address&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the IP address(es) that <b>mongod</b> binds to and listens for connections. Use 0.0.0.0 to bind to all available network interfaces. By default, it binds to localhost (127.0.0.1).<br><br><b><b>--logpath</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the absolute path to a file for logging all diagnostic output. Logging is essential for monitoring and troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>--fork</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forks the <b>mongod</b> process to run in the background as a daemon. This is commonly used when starting <b>mongod</b> directly from the command line.<br><br><b><b>--config</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a configuration file for <b>mongod</b> options. This is the recommended way to configure <b>mongod</b> in production environments, typically using YAML format.<br><br><b><b>--auth</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables authentication. Clients must authenticate to access the database. Highly recommended for production deployments.<br><br><b><b>--journal</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables journaling to ensure data consistency and durability. Journaling is enabled by default on 64-bit systems and is crucial for recovering from unclean shutdowns.<br><br><b><b>--nojournal</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables journaling. <i>Not recommended for production deployments</i> as it increases the risk of data loss upon unexpected shutdown.<br><br><b><b>--replSet</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the name of the replica set to which this <b>mongod</b> instance belongs. This option is necessary for setting up high availability.<br><br><b><b>--shardsvr</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Configures this <b>mongod</b> instance to function as a shard server in a sharded cluster. This enables horizontal scaling.<br><br><b><b>--configsvr</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Configures this <b>mongod</b> instance to function as a config server in a sharded cluster. Config servers store the cluster's metadata.<br><br><b><b>--storageEngine</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the storage engine for <b>mongod</b> to use, e.g., <i>wiredTiger</i> (default) or <i>mmapv1</i>.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the <b>mongod</b> version number and exits.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with all available options and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mongod</b> command is the primary daemon process for the MongoDB database system. It handles data requests, manages data access, and performs essential background management operations. When you run <b>mongod</b>, it initializes and hosts the MongoDB data directory, making your data available for client applications. Key functionalities include supporting replica sets for high availability, sharding for horizontal scalability, and ensuring data durability through journaling. It manages client connections, authenticates users, and executes various database operations like queries, updates, and aggregations. Users typically run <b>mongod</b> as a background service, often configured via a YAML file, to ensure continuous database operation and provide a robust data storage solution.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Permissions:</b> Ensure the user running <b>mongod</b> has appropriate read and write permissions to the <b>--dbpath</b> and <b>--logpath</b> directories.<br><br><b>Journaling:</b> Disabling journaling with <b>--nojournal</b> can lead to data loss in the event of an unexpected shutdown. It is strongly discouraged for production systems, where data durability is paramount.<br><br><b>Security:</b> By default, <b>mongod</b> may bind only to localhost (127.0.0.1). For network access, you must explicitly use <b>--bind_ip</b>. Always combine this with <b>--auth</b> and robust network security measures (e.g., firewalls) to prevent unauthorized access.


title: DEFAULT DATA DIRECTORY
content:
If the <b>--dbpath</b> option is not specified, <b>mongod</b> defaults to storing data in <i>/data/db</i> on Linux and macOS systems. Ensure this directory exists and has the correct permissions for the user running <b>mongod</b>.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
MongoDB strongly recommends using a configuration file (typically in YAML format) for running <b>mongod</b> in production environments. This method allows for cleaner management of numerous options and their values, promoting better organization and readability.


title: RUNNING AS A SERVICE
content:
For production deployments, <b>mongod</b> is almost always run as a background service managed by an init system like <b>systemd</b> (on modern Linux distributions) or <b>SysVinit</b>. This ensures that the database starts automatically on boot and can be easily managed (start, stop, restart) using standard system commands.


title: HISTORY
content:
The MongoDB project, and consequently the <b>mongod</b> daemon, was initiated in 2007 by 10gen (now MongoDB Inc.) as a component of a planned platform-as-a-service product. When the company pivoted away from the PaaS model, it decided to release MongoDB as an open-source, document-oriented database. The first public release was in 2009. Over the years, <b>mongod</b> has evolved significantly, incorporating key features like the WiredTiger storage engine (introduced in version 3.0), advanced security options, and enhanced scalability capabilities, solidifying its position as a leading NoSQL database.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mongodump</b> [<I>options</I>]<br>Example: <b>mongodump</b> <I>--host localhost --port 27017 --db mydatabase --out /data/backup</I><br>Example with URI: <b>mongodump</b> <I>--uri 'mongodb://localhost:27017/mydatabase' --archive=mydump.archive --gzip</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>--help</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message describing command-line options and usage.<br><br><b><I>--version</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version of the <i>mongodump</i> utility.<br><br><b><I>--uri &lt;uri&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the MongoDB connection string URI. This is an alternative to specifying <i>--host</i>, <i>--port</i>, etc.<br><br><b><I>--host &lt;hostname&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the hostname or IP address of the <i>mongod</i> instance to connect to.<br><br><b><I>--port &lt;port&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the port number of the <i>mongod</i> instance to connect to.<br><br><b><I>--db &lt;database&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the database to dump. If omitted, <i>mongodump</i> dumps all databases (excluding local and admin unless specified).<br><br><b><I>--collection &lt;collection&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the collection to dump. Must be used with <i>--db</i>. If omitted, all collections in the specified database are dumped.<br><br><b><I>--out &lt;directory&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output directory for the dump files. Defaults to <i>dump/</i> in the current working directory.<br><br><b><I>--username &lt;username&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the username for authentication.<br><br><b><I>--password &lt;password&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the password for authentication. If omitted and a username is provided, <i>mongodump</i> will prompt for a password.<br><br><b><I>--gzip</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compresses the output BSON files using gzip. The output files will have a <i>.gz</i> extension.<br><br><b><I>--query &lt;json-query&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides a JSON document as a query to filter documents in the collection to be dumped. Requires <i>--db</i> and <i>--collection</i>.<br><br><b><I>--oplog</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For replica sets, includes the oplog entries from the beginning of the dump to the end. Essential for point-in-time recovery with <i>mongorestore --oplogReplay</i>.<br><br><b><I>--archive=&lt;file&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dumps the database to a single archive file instead of a directory of BSON files. Can be used with <i>--gzip</i> for compression.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mongodump</i> is a utility within the MongoDB Database Tools that creates a binary export of data from a MongoDB instance. It connects to a running <i>mongod</i> process and writes all data, or a subset, into a binary BSON format, suitable for later restoration using <i>mongorestore</i>. By default, it exports all databases to a <i>dump/</i> directory, with each collection stored as a separate .bson file alongside .json metadata files. This utility is fundamental for database backup and migration strategies. It allows users to dump an entire MongoDB instance, specific databases, or even individual collections. Advanced options enable filtering documents with a query, compressing the output, or including oplog entries for point-time recovery in replica sets. While older versions might have imposed significant read locks, modern MongoDB versions with the WiredTiger storage engine allow <i>mongodump</i> to run with minimal impact on application availability.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When dumping a running <i>mongod</i> instance, <i>mongodump</i> generally creates a consistent snapshot without blocking reads/writes for modern MongoDB versions (WiredTiger storage engine).<br>For replica sets, using the <i>--oplog</i> option is crucial for enabling point-in-time recovery, as it captures all operations during the dump process. Without <i>--oplog</i>, a restore operation would only recover data up to the start time of the dump.<br><i>mongodump</i> does not back up indexes or user-defined roles/privileges; these are restored by <i>mongorestore</i> from the system collections' metadata. It is generally not suitable for backing up the entire filesystem structure of a MongoDB data directory.


title: BEST PRACTICES
content:
Always test your <i>mongodump</i> backups by performing a full <i>mongorestore</i> operation on a separate instance to ensure data integrity and recoverability. For replica sets, consistently use the <i>--oplog</i> option to enable precise point-in-time recovery. Regularly schedule dumps, preferably during off-peak hours for very large databases, and store backups in a secure, off-site location.<br>When dumping sharded clusters, connect <i>mongodump</i> to a <i>mongos</i> instance to ensure a consistent view of the cluster data, or dump each shard individually for more granular control (though this complicates consistency).


title: OUTPUT STRUCTURE
content:
By default, <i>mongodump</i> creates a directory named <i>dump/</i> (or the directory specified by <i>--out</i>) in the current working directory. Inside, there are subdirectories for each dumped database, and within those, <i>.bson</i> files for each collection (containing the actual data) and corresponding <i>.metadata.json</i> files (containing index definitions, collection options, etc.). Using <i>--archive</i> consolidates all data into a single, compact archive file, which simplifies transfer and storage.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>mongodump</i> has been a core utility of the MongoDB Database Tools since the early days of MongoDB, serving as the primary method for binary database backups. Its functionality has evolved significantly: initial versions might have caused global read locks during the dump, but advancements in MongoDB storage engines (like WiredTiger) allow for a non-blocking or minimally blocking dump process. The introduction of options like <i>--oplog</i> enhanced its capabilities for replica set recovery, and <i>--archive</i> streamlined output management. It continues to be actively developed, adapting to new MongoDB features and best practices for data management.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I>mpstat</I> [ <B>-A</B> ] [ <B>-I</B> { <I>SUM</I> | <I>CPU</I> | <I>ALL</I> } ] [ <B>-P</B> { <I>cpu_list</I> | <I>ALL</I> } ] [ <B>-u</B> ] [ <B>-V</B> ] [ <I>interval</I> [ <I>count</I> ] ]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>interval</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the delay in seconds between each report. A value of zero (0) indicates a single report with statistics since boot.<br><br><b><I>count</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of reports generated. If <I>interval</I> is specified without <I>count</I>, reports are generated continuously.<br><br><b><B>-A</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays all activities. This option is equivalent to specifying <B>-u -I ALL -P ALL</B>.<br><br><b><B>-I</B> { <I>SUM</I> | <I>CPU</I> | <I>ALL</I> }</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reports global (<I>SUM</I>), per-CPU (<I>CPU</I>), or all (<I>ALL</I>) interrupt statistics. <B>-I SUM</B> is the default.<br><br><b><B>-P</B> { <I>cpu_list</I> | <I>ALL</I> }</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays statistics for the specified processor(s) or all processors (<I>ALL</I>). <I>cpu_list</I> is a comma-separated list of CPU numbers (e.g., <B>0,2,4</B>).<br><br><b><B>-u</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reports CPU utilization statistics (the default if no other flags are given and no interval/count are specified).<br><br><b><B>-V</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version number of the <I>mpstat</I> command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>mpstat</I> command is a powerful utility within the <I>sysstat</I> package designed to monitor and report processor-related statistics for both individual CPUs and the system as a whole in Linux. It provides detailed insights into how your system's CPUs are being utilized, including user-level processes, system-level processes, I/O wait times, idle times, and interrupt handling. This makes it invaluable for performance analysis, identifying CPU bottlenecks, and understanding system load distribution across multiple cores. By specifying an interval and count, <I>mpstat</I> can provide real-time updates, allowing administrators and developers to observe trends and troubleshoot performance issues effectively. It differentiates itself by offering per-CPU breakdown, which is essential for diagnosing issues in multi-core environments where one core might be overloaded while others are idle.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li>The <I>mpstat</I> command is part of the <I>sysstat</I> package, which must be installed on your Linux system (e.g., <B>sudo apt-get install sysstat</B> on Debian/Ubuntu, <B>sudo yum install sysstat</B> on RHEL/CentOS).</li><li>Data accuracy relies on the kernel's <B>/proc/stat</B> file.</li><li>Interpreting the output requires understanding of CPU states like <B>%usr</B>, <B>%sys</B>, <B>%iowait</B>, and <B>%idle</B>.</li><li>Running <I>mpstat</I> with a very small interval can add slight overhead, though usually negligible.</li></ul>


title: OUTPUT INTERPRETATION
content:
Understanding the columns displayed by <I>mpstat</I> is key to effective analysis.<br><B>%usr</B>: Percentage of CPU utilization that occurred while executing at the user level (application).<br><B>%nice</B>: Percentage of CPU utilization that occurred while executing at the user level with nice priority.<br><B>%sys</B>: Percentage of CPU utilization that occurred while executing at the system level (kernel).<br><B>%iowait</B>: Percentage of time that the CPU or CPUs were idle during which the system had an outstanding disk I/O request.<br><B>%irq</B>: Percentage of time spent servicing hardware interrupts.<br><B>%softirq</B>: Percentage of time spent servicing software interrupts.<br><B>%steal</B>: Percentage of time spent in involuntary wait by the virtual CPU or CPUs while the hypervisor was servicing another virtual processor. (Relevant in virtualized environments).<br><B>%guest</B>: Percentage of time spent by the virtual CPU or CPUs for running a guest (virtual machine) operating system.<br><B>%gnice</B>: Percentage of time spent by the virtual CPU or CPUs for running a niced guest (virtual machine) operating system.<br><B>%idle</B>: Percentage of time that the CPU or CPUs were idle and the system did not have an outstanding disk I/O request.<br><I>Note: The sum of these percentages should be approximately 100%.</I>


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>mpstat</I> is a component of the comprehensive <I>sysstat</I> utilities suite, which has been under continuous development for Linux systems since the late 1990s. Developed primarily by Sébastien Godard, <I>sysstat</I> tools like <I>mpstat</I> emerged as essential tools for system administrators to monitor and diagnose performance issues, particularly as multiprocessor systems became more prevalent. Its development has focused on providing granular, real-time, and historical data for various system resources, making it a cornerstone of Linux performance analysis.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--force-po</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force writing of a PO file, even if it has no messages.<br><br><b>--lang=LANGUAGE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify target language. Used for plural forms.<br><br><b>--previous</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retain previous <i>msgid</i>s of fuzzy entries. Highly recommended for translators.<br><br><b>--no-fuzzy-matching</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not attempt fuzzy matching. New strings are untranslated.<br><br><b>--add-location</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add <i>#: file:line</i> style location lines to the output.<br><br><b>--no-location</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not add <i>#: file:line</i> style location lines to the output.<br><br><b>--sort-output</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort output entries by <i>msgid</i>.<br><br><b>--sort-by-file</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort output entries by source file location.<br><br><b>--color[=WHEN]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use color to highlight messages; <i>WHEN</i> can be <i>always</i>, <i>never</i>, or <i>auto</i>.<br><br><b>--silent, -s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress warnings.<br><br><b>--verbose, -v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print verbose messages.<br><br><b>--backup=CONTROL</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Make a backup of <i>EXISTING-POFILE</i>. <i>CONTROL</i> specifies backup policy.<br><br><b>--no-backup</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not make any backup.<br><br><b>--suffix=SUFFIX</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Override the usual backup suffix.<br><br><b>--directory=DIR, -D DIR</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add <i>DIR</i> to the list of directories scanned for dependencies.<br><br><b>--width=NUMBER</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set output page width for PO files.<br><br><b>--indent</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Indent the body of the <i>msgstr</i> lines in multiline entries.<br><br><b>--no-indent</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not indent the body of the <i>msgstr</i> lines.<br><br><b>--strict</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate in strict mode (e.g., check for syntax errors).<br><br><b>--warn-format</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Warn about suspicious <i>printf</i> format strings.<br><br><b>--warn-domain</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Warn about unknown domains in <i>#| msgid</i> comments.<br><br><b>--statistics</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print statistics about the number of translated/untranslated entries.<br><br><b>--version, -V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display help and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<code>msgmerge</code> is a crucial utility within the GNU Gettext internationalization (i18n) framework. Its primary function is to update an existing translation catalog file (a <i>.po</i> file) with new messages or changes from another source, typically a <i>.pot</i> (Portable Object Template) file or another <i>.po</i> file. This process is essential for maintaining translations as software evolves and source code changes.<br><br>When <code>msgmerge</code> is run, it compares the messages in the target <i>.po</i> file with the messages in the new template. It adds new messages, removes obsolete ones, and updates existing messages that have changed in the source. For changed messages, <code>msgmerge</code> attempts to provide a "fuzzy" translation, marking the message as needing review by a human translator. This preserves the previous translation as a guide, significantly reducing the manual effort required to keep translations current. It ensures that translators only need to focus on new or modified strings, rather than re-translating the entire application.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>Fuzzy Translations</b>: While helpful, "fuzzy" matches are not perfect and always require manual review by a human translator to ensure accuracy and contextual correctness.</li><li><b>Context Changes</b>: If a message's context changes significantly without its <i>msgid</i> changing, <code>msgmerge</code> might not identify it as a changed message, potentially leading to incorrect translations.</li><li><b>Plural Forms</b>: Correct handling of plural forms relies on accurate <i>Plural-Forms</i> headers in the PO files and can be a source of errors if misconfigured.</li><li><b>Encoding</b>: Ensure consistent character encoding across all input files to prevent garbled text.</li></ul>


title: INPUT AND OUTPUT FILES
content:
<code>msgmerge</code> takes two primary arguments: an <i>EXISTING-POFILE</i> (the translation file to be updated) and a <i>TEMPLATE-POFILE</i> (usually a <i>.pot</i> file generated by <code>xgettext</code> or a <i>.po</i> file from another source). The output is written to the <i>EXISTING-POFILE</i> by default, overwriting it.


title: THE <CODE>--PREVIOUS</CODE> OPTION
content:
This option is highly recommended for translators. When a message is updated and marked as "fuzzy," <code>msgmerge</code> normally includes the old <i>msgid</i> in a <i>#| msgid</i> comment. <i>--previous</i> ensures that the <b>previous translation</b> (the <i>msgstr</i> before the merge) is also included as a comment, making it easier for translators to see what changed and quickly adapt the translation.


title: FUZZY TRANSLATIONS
content:
When <code>msgmerge</code> finds a message that has changed slightly but is still recognizable, it marks the corresponding translation as "fuzzy." This means the translation might be close but requires human verification. Fuzzy entries are often excluded by <code>msgfmt</code> unless explicitly told to include them, ensuring that unverified translations do not end up in the final compiled translation file.


title: HISTORY
content:
<code>msgmerge</code> is an integral part of the GNU Gettext utilities, a project initiated in the early 1990s to provide a standard framework for internationalization and localization (i18n/l10n) in free software. Its development aimed to streamline the translation update process, a common bottleneck as software evolves rapidly. Before tools like <code>msgmerge</code>, updating translations often meant re-translating entire files or painstaking manual comparison. By intelligently merging new templates with existing translations, <code>msgmerge</code> significantly improved the efficiency and maintainability of multilingual software projects, becoming a cornerstone for translators working with Gettext.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the <i>Mutter</i> version information and exits.<br><br><b><b>--display=</b><i>DISPLAY</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the X display to connect to when running in an X11 environment.<br><br><b><b>--sync</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Synchronizes with the X server for debugging purposes, potentially reducing performance.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debugging output, useful for troubleshooting graphical issues.<br><br><b><b>--replace</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Instructs <i>Mutter</i> to replace any currently running window manager.<br><br><b><b>--nested</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts <i>Mutter</i> as a nested Wayland compositor, typically for testing or development.<br><br><b><b>--enable-xwayland</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the explicit enablement of XWayland support, allowing X11 applications to run under Wayland.<br><br><b><b>--disable-xwayland</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables XWayland support, preventing X11 applications from running under Wayland.<br><br><b><b>--wayland</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces <i>Mutter</i> to use the Wayland backend for compositing, even if X11 might be available.<br><br><b><b>--no-x11</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables the X11 backend entirely, ensuring <i>Mutter</i> runs purely on Wayland.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>Mutter</i> is the cornerstone of the <B>GNOME</B> desktop environment, serving as its primary window manager and display compositor. It is responsible for drawing windows, handling window placement, resizing, and focus, and managing visual effects like shadows and transparency. Built upon <B>OpenGL</B> for rendering, <i>Mutter</i> integrates with both <B>Wayland</B> and <B>X11</B> display protocols, providing a modern and efficient graphical experience.<br><br>Unlike typical command-line utilities, <i>Mutter</i> is not usually invoked directly by end-users. Instead, it starts automatically as an integral part of the <B>GNOME</B> session, working in conjunction with <B>GNOME Shell</B> to provide the complete desktop interface. Direct command-line usage is generally reserved for developers, debugging purposes, or highly customized desktop setups.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>Mutter</i> is a core system component and not a general-purpose command-line utility for end-users. Incorrect direct invocation can lead to a non-functional or unstable desktop environment. It is primarily managed by the desktop session manager.<br><br>Many of its command-line options are intended for debugging or development and should be used with caution.


title: CORE FUNCTIONALITIES
content:
<i>Mutter</i> provides several critical functionalities for the <B>GNOME</B> desktop:<br><br><B>Compositing</B>: It combines the contents of all open windows into a single image before sending it to the display, enabling visual effects like shadows, transparency, and animations.<br><br><B>Window Management</B>: It handles the placement, resizing, minimizing, maximizing, and closing of application windows, ensuring a consistent user interaction.<br><br><B>Display Protocol Integration</B>: It acts as the bridge between applications and the display hardware, supporting both the traditional <B>X11</B> protocol and the modern <B>Wayland</B> protocol.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>Mutter</i> was developed as a replacement for <B>Metacity</B>, the previous window manager for <B>GNOME</B> 2. Its name is a portmanteau combining 'Metacity' and 'Clutter' (a graphics library which <i>Mutter</i> historically utilized for its rendering). It first appeared as the default window manager and compositor for <B>GNOME 3</B>, marking a significant shift towards modern compositing and <B>Wayland</B> support, enhancing the visual fidelity and responsiveness of the desktop experience.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mv</b> [<i>OPTION</i>]... <i>SOURCE</i> <i>DESTINATION</i><br><b>mv</b> [<i>OPTION</i>]... <i>SOURCE</i>... <i>DIRECTORY</i><br><b>mv</b> [<i>OPTION</i>]... -t <i>DIRECTORY</i> <i>SOURCE</i>...


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-f, --force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not prompt before overwriting an existing file.<br><br><b>-i, --interactive</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prompt before overwriting an existing file.<br><br><b>-n, --no-clobber</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not overwrite an existing file. This is the opposite of <b>-f</b>.<br><br><b>-u, --update</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Move only when the SOURCE file is newer than the DESTINATION file or when the DESTINATION file is missing.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explain what is being done. Shows the names of files as they are moved.<br><br><b>-t, --target-directory=<i>DIRECTORY</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Move all SOURCE arguments into <i>DIRECTORY</i>. Useful for moving multiple files to a specific directory.<br><br><b>-b, --backup[=<i>CONTROL</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Make a backup of an existing destination file before overwriting it. <i>CONTROL</i> can specify the backup method.<br><br><b>-S, --suffix=<i>SUFFIX</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Override the usual backup suffix (e.g., '~' or '.bak').<br><br><b>-T, --no-target-directory</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treat <i>DESTINATION</i> as a normal file, not a directory, even if it has the same name as an existing directory. Useful when renaming a file to a name that matches an existing directory.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mv</b> command is a fundamental Unix utility used to move files and directories from one location to another, or to rename a file or directory within the same location.<br><br>When moving files or directories within the same filesystem, <b>mv</b> performs an atomic operation by simply updating the directory entry, which is very fast and preserves the inode number. This means permissions, ownership, and timestamps are generally retained.<br><br>However, when moving files or directories across different filesystems, <b>mv</b> operates by copying the source to the destination and then deleting the original. This process is not atomic and can be slower, especially for large files. In such cases, new permissions and ownership might be applied based on the destination filesystem's defaults or the user's umask settings. If the copy fails, the original file might still exist, providing some fault tolerance.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When moving files across different filesystems, <b>mv</b> behaves as a copy-and-delete operation, which is not atomic. This means if the process is interrupted (e.g., due to power loss), the file might be incomplete or missing from both locations. Ensure sufficient disk space on the destination when moving large files across filesystems. Permissions are crucial: you must have write permissions in both the source and destination directories.


title: ATOMIC RENAMING
content:
On the same filesystem, <b>mv</b> uses the <b>rename()</b> system call, which is an atomic operation. This guarantees that a file is either fully moved/renamed or remains in its original state, even during system crashes, preventing data corruption for single files.


title: DIRECTORY HANDLING
content:
When moving a directory, <b>mv</b> moves the directory itself and all its contents (subdirectories and files). If the destination directory already exists, the source directory becomes a subdirectory of the destination. If the destination does not exist, the source directory is renamed to the destination name.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>mv</b> command has been a staple of Unix-like operating systems since their inception, providing a fundamental file system manipulation capability. It's part of the core utilities, standardized by POSIX, ensuring consistent behavior across various systems. Over time, GNU Coreutils and other implementations have added useful options like <b>-t</b> (target directory) and <b>-u</b> (update) to enhance its flexibility and safety, while maintaining its original simplicity for basic operations.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-B</b>, <b>--batch-mode</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Runs Maven in non-interactive (batch) mode, useful for CI/CD environments.<br><br><b><b>-D</b><i>&lt;property&gt;=&lt;value&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines a system property, often used to pass parameters to plugins (e.g., <i>-DskipTests=true</i>).<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>--file</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative path for the Project Object Model (POM) file instead of the default <i>pom.xml</i>.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> <i>&lt;arg&gt;</i>, <b>--activate-profiles</b> <i>&lt;arg&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates a comma-separated list of profiles defined in the POM or settings file.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>--settings</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative path for the user settings file (<i>settings.xml</i>).<br><br><b><b>-U</b>, <b>--update-snapshots</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces a check for updated releases and snapshots on remote repositories.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--offline</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Works in offline mode, preventing Maven from connecting to remote repositories.<br><br><b><b>-N</b>, <b>--non-recursive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Builds the project in the current directory only, skipping sub-modules in a multi-module project.<br><br><b><b>-X</b>, <b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produces detailed execution debug output, useful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--errors</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produces verbose execution error messages.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the Maven version information.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information for the Maven command.<br><br><b><b>-T</b> <i>&lt;arg&gt;</i>, <b>--threads</b> <i>&lt;arg&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of threads for parallel builds (e.g., <i>2.0C</i> for 2 cores, <i>4</i> for 4 threads).<br><br><b><b>-pl</b> <i>&lt;arg&gt;</i>, <b>--projects</b> <i>&lt;arg&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Builds specific reactor projects instead of all (e.g., <i>-pl project-a,project-b</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mvn</b> command invokes Apache Maven, a powerful open-source project management and comprehension tool primarily used for Java projects. It is based on the concept of a Project Object Model (POM), an XML file (<i>pom.xml</i>) that contains information about the project and configuration details used by Maven. Maven streamlines the build process by standardizing build phases like compilation, testing, packaging, and deployment. <br><br>It provides robust dependency management, automatically downloading and managing project libraries. Its 'convention over configuration' approach encourages a standard project structure, simplifying builds and reducing setup overhead. Maven's functionality is highly extensible through a rich plugin architecture, allowing it to handle various tasks beyond basic compilation, such as reporting, documentation generation, and release management. It aims to make the daily work of a Java developer easier by providing a consistent and comprehensive build system.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Maven can be resource-intensive, consuming significant memory and CPU, especially for large multi-module projects. Its XML-based configuration, while powerful, can become verbose and complex, leading to a steeper learning curve for new users. Resolving intricate dependency conflicts can also be challenging and time-consuming. <br>Furthermore, relying heavily on remote repositories means build times can be affected by network latency or repository availability.


title: PROJECT OBJECT MODEL (POM)
content:
The <i>pom.xml</i> file is the fundamental unit of work in Maven. It contains information about the project, its build configuration, dependencies, plugins, and profiles. Understanding the POM is crucial for configuring and customizing Maven builds.


title: BUILD LIFECYCLE
content:
Maven defines a set of standard build lifecycles (e.g., <i>clean</i>, <i>default</i>, <i>site</i>). Each lifecycle consists of phases (e.g., <i>validate</i>, <i>compile</i>, <i>test</i>, <i>package</i>, <i>install</i>, <i>deploy</i>). Executing a phase means executing all preceding phases in that lifecycle. For example, <b>mvn install</b> will execute all phases up to <i>install</i> in the <i>default</i> lifecycle.


title: PLUGINS
content:
Maven's core functionality is implemented as plugins. Plugins provide goals that execute specific tasks during a build. Maven's extensibility comes from its vast array of available plugins for compilation, testing, reporting, code analysis, and much more. Developers can also create custom plugins.


title: HISTORY
content:
Apache Maven originated from the Apache Turbine project in 2001 and was publicly released in 2004. Developed by Jason van Zyl, it aimed to address the complexities of traditional build systems by providing a standard, convention-based approach to project builds. Its innovative dependency management and consistent lifecycle phases quickly led to widespread adoption within the Java community, becoming a de facto standard for Java project management and build automation. Subsequent versions have focused on performance improvements, enhanced plugin capabilities, and better support for modern development paradigms.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>tar</B> <I>[MODE] [OPTIONS] [ARCHIVE_FILE] [FILES_OR_DIRECTORIES...]</I><br><br>Common Modes:<br> &nbsp; <B>tar -c</B> <I>[OPTIONS] -f ARCHIVE_FILE [FILES_OR_DIRECTORIES...]</I> &nbsp; (Create)<br> &nbsp; <B>tar -x</B> <I>[OPTIONS] -f ARCHIVE_FILE [FILES_OR_DIRECTORIES...]</I> &nbsp; (Extract)<br> &nbsp; <B>tar -t</B> <I>[OPTIONS] -f ARCHIVE_FILE</I> &nbsp; (List contents)


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><B>-c</B>, <B>--create</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a new archive.<br><br><b><B>-x</B>, <B>--extract</B>, <B>--get</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts files from an archive.<br><br><b><B>-t</B>, <B>--list</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists the contents of an archive.<br><br><b><B>-f</B> <I>ARCHIVE</I>, <B>--file=</B><I>ARCHIVE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the archive file to work with. If omitted, <B>tar</B> uses standard input/output.<br><br><b><B>-v</B>, <B>--verbose</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed information about the files being processed (e.g., file names during creation/extraction).<br><br><b><B>-z</B>, <B>--gzip</B>, <B>--ungzip</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters the archive through <I>gzip</I>, for creating or extracting .tar.gz or .tgz files.<br><br><b><B>-j</B>, <B>--bzip2</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters the archive through <I>bzip2</I>, for creating or extracting .tar.bz2 or .tbz files.<br><br><b><B>-J</B>, <B>--xz</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters the archive through <I>xz</I>, for creating or extracting .tar.xz or .txz files.<br><br><b><B>-a</B>, <B>--auto-compress</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the archive suffix to determine the compression program (e.g., .gz implies gzip, .bz2 implies bzip2).<br><br><b><B>-C</B> <I>DIRECTORY</I>, <B>--directory=</B><I>DIRECTORY</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Changes to <I>DIRECTORY</I> before performing the operation. Useful for extracting files to a specific location.<br><br><b><B>--exclude=</B><I>PATTERN</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Excludes files matching <I>PATTERN</I> from the archive.<br><br><b><B>-p</B>, <B>--preserve-permissions</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Preserves file permissions (mode bits) during extraction. This is often implied by <B>--same-permissions</B>.<br><br><b><B>--remove-files</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes files from the disk after adding them to the archive. Use with caution!<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Please note: The command <I>mxtar</I> is not a standard, widely distributed Linux command. This analysis is based on the highly probable interpretation that <I>mxtar</I> is either a typo for the ubiquitous <B>tar</B> (Tape ARchive) command, a custom script or alias wrapping <B>tar</B>, or a very niche/obsolete utility. The information provided below pertains to the standard <B>tar</B> command, which is fundamental for archiving and extracting files on Unix-like operating systems like Linux.<br><br>The <B>tar</B> command is used to create and manipulate archive files. An archive file typically contains a collection of files and directories, preserving their structure, permissions, and other metadata. While originally designed for tape backups, <B>tar</B> archives are commonly stored on disk files. It can combine multiple files into a single archive, extract files from an existing archive, list the contents of an archive, or even add files to an existing one. <B>tar</B> itself does not compress files, but it can integrate with external compression utilities like <I>gzip</I>, <I>bzip2</I>, or <I>xz</I> to create compressed archives (e.g., .tar.gz, .tgz, .tar.bz2, .tbz, .tar.xz, .txz). This makes <B>tar</B> an indispensable tool for data backup, software distribution, and general file management.


title: CAVEATS
content:
As noted in the description, <I>mxtar</I> is not a standard Linux command. The information provided is for the <B>tar</B> command.<br><br>When extracting archives, be mindful of absolute paths. If an archive contains files with absolute paths (e.g., <I>/etc/passwd</I>), <B>tar</B> will typically strip the leading slash by default for security, but some options or older versions might not. Always extract archives into a clean, empty directory to avoid overwriting existing system files. Permissions and ownership can also be tricky; by default, files are extracted with the permissions and ownership of the user running the command, unless <B>-p</B> is used (for permissions) or the command is run as root (for ownership).


title: COMMON USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
Here are some common ways to use <B>tar</B>:<br><br><B>Create a compressed archive:</B><br><I>tar -czf myarchive.tar.gz /home/user/documents</I><br> &nbsp; (Archives 'documents' directory into 'myarchive.tar.gz' using gzip compression.)<br><br><B>Extract a compressed archive:</B><br><I>tar -xzf myarchive.tar.gz -C /tmp/extracted_data</I><br> &nbsp; (Extracts 'myarchive.tar.gz' to '/tmp/extracted_data' using gzip decompression.)<br><br><B>List contents of an archive:</B><br><I>tar -tvf myarchive.tar.gz</I><br> &nbsp; (Lists the files within 'myarchive.tar.gz' with verbose details.)<br><br><B>Archive multiple files/directories:</B><br><I>tar -cvf backup.tar /etc/config /var/log/syslog.log</I><br> &nbsp; (Archives selected files and directories into 'backup.tar'.)


title: PATH HANDLING
content:
When creating archives, <B>tar</B> stores paths relative to the directory it's run from, unless you specify absolute paths. It's generally best practice to change into the directory you want to archive and then specify files relative to that, or use the <B>-C</B> option. For instance, to archive <I>/home/user/data</I>, it's better to do <I>tar -cf archive.tar -C /home/user data</I> than <I>tar -cf archive.tar /home/user/data</I>, as the former will store 'data/' at the archive root, while the latter will store 'home/user/data/'.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <B>tar</B> command originated in the early days of Unix, primarily developed for backing up data to sequential access storage devices, particularly magnetic tape drives (hence <I>Tape ARchive</I>). It became a de facto standard for packaging files. The GNU project developed <I>GNU tar</I>, which is the most common version found on Linux systems today. GNU tar extended the original utility with numerous features, including support for larger file sizes, integration with various compression programs, and more flexible options for manipulating archives on disk files rather than just tape devices.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
mycli <i>[OPTIONS]</i> <i>[DATABASE_NAME_OR_URL]</i><br><br>Connects to a database using provided credentials or a connection URL.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --host <hostname></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connect to MySQL or PostgreSQL on the specified host.<br><br><b>-u, --user <username></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;User for login if not current user.<br><br><b>-p, --password[=<password>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Password to use when connecting to the database. If omitted, prompts for password.<br><br><b>-P, --port <port_num></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;TCP/IP port number to use for the connection.<br><br><b>-D, --database <db_name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Database to use after connecting. Can also be specified as an argument without the flag.<br><br><b>--ssl-ca <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;CA file in PEM format for SSL connection.<br><br><b>--ssl-cert <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;X.509 certificate in PEM format for SSL connection.<br><br><b>--ssl-key <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;X.509 key in PEM format for SSL connection.<br><br><b>--auto-vertical-output</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically switch to vertical output mode if the result is too wide.<br><br><b>--pager <pager_command></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a pager command to use for results (e.g., 'less -S').<br><br><b>--editor</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Open the default text editor for multi-line queries.<br><br><b>--config <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative configuration file path.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show program's version number and exit.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show a help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
mycli is a powerful, user-friendly command-line interface for popular relational databases including <b>MySQL</b>, <b>PostgreSQL</b>, and <b>SQLite</b>. Developed as a modern alternative to traditional database clients, it significantly enhances the terminal-based database interaction experience. Its standout features include robust <i>auto-completion</i>, which intelligently suggests SQL keywords, table names, column names, and view names as you type, making query construction faster and less error-prone. Additionally, mycli provides beautiful <i>syntax highlighting</i> for all SQL queries, greatly improving readability and aiding in the identification of syntax errors. <br><br>Beyond these core features, mycli offers smart auto-completion that understands the context of your query, support for pagers to handle large result sets efficiently, and the ability to connect securely using SSL/TLS. It is built upon the <i>prompt_toolkit</i> library for its rich interactive features and <i>Pygments</i> for syntax highlighting, ensuring a highly responsive and visually appealing interface. mycli is a valuable tool for developers, database administrators, and anyone who frequently interacts with these databases from the command line, transforming a often cumbersome task into a more streamlined and enjoyable workflow.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While mycli offers a superior interactive experience, it is <i>not a full replacement for every advanced feature</i> found in native clients like <b>mysql</b> or <b>psql</b>, particularly those related to specific administrative utilities or highly specialized commands (e.g., data dumping, binary log analysis). It primarily focuses on query execution and data interaction. Also, being Python-based, it requires a Python installation to run.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE
content:
<i>mycli</i> can be extensively customized via a configuration file, typically located at <b>~/.myclirc</b>. This file allows users to define settings such as key bindings, color themes, pager options, and various behavioral preferences, tailoring the CLI experience to individual needs.


title: CONNECTION STRING
content:
Beyond standard host, user, and password parameters, <i>mycli</i> supports connecting to databases using a comprehensive <b>URL connection string</b>. This format allows for a single, concise argument to specify all connection details, including username, password, host, port, database, and even SSL parameters, making it convenient for scripting or quick connections.<br>Example: <i>mycli mysql://user:pass@host:3306/dbname?sslmode=require</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
mycli was created by <b>Amjith Ramanujam</b> and first released in <b>2015</b>. It quickly gained traction as a more modern and user-friendly alternative to traditional database command-line clients. It is built upon the robust Python ecosystem, leveraging libraries like <i>prompt_toolkit</i> for its advanced terminal interaction features and <i>Pygments</i> for syntax highlighting. mycli is part of a family of similarly designed command-line tools, including <b>pgcli</b> for PostgreSQL, which share a common architectural philosophy focused on user experience and productivity. Its development was driven by the desire to bring features common in modern IDEs (like auto-completion and syntax highlighting) directly to the command line for database interactions.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b> <i>host_name</i>, <b>--host</b>=<i>host_name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <i>host_name</i> where the MySQL server is running. Can be <b>localhost</b> or an IP address.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> <i>port_num</i>, <b>--port</b>=<i>port_num</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects to the server using the specified TCP/IP <i>port_num</i>. Default is <b>3306</b>.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>user_name</i>, <b>--user</b>=<i>user_name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The MySQL user account <i>user_name</i> to use for authentication.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>[<i>password</i>], <b>--password</b>[=<i>password</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prompts for a password if <i>password</i> is not provided. If provided directly, it should be immediately after <b>-p</b> with no space (e.g., <b>-pmypass</b>).<br><br><b><b>-D</b> <i>db_name</i>, <b>--database</b>=<i>db_name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the default database <i>db_name</i> to use after connecting.<br><br><b><b>-e</b> <i>statement</i>, <b>--execute</b>=<i>statement</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes the SQL <i>statement</i> and exits. Useful for non-interactive scripting.<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Continues processing even if an SQL error occurs. Relevant for batch operations.<br><br><b><b>-N</b>, <b>--skip-column-names</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not write column names in the output. Useful for scripting where only data is needed.<br><br><b><b>-B</b>, <b>--batch</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints results with a tab as a separator, each row on a new line. Disables history and interactive features.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quick</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Does not cache results, printing row by row. Can be useful for large result sets to save memory.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--silent</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Silent mode. Produces less output, suppressing informational messages.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--table</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays output in a formatted table. This is the default for interactive mode.<br><br><b><b>-X</b>, <b>--xml</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produces output in XML format. Useful for machine parsing.<br><br><b><b>-H</b>, <b>--html</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produces output in HTML format. Useful for generating web pages.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--vertical</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints output vertically, with each column on a new line. Useful for wide tables or viewing CLOB/TEXT fields.<br><br><b><b>--help</b>, <b>-?</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mysql</b> command is the primary command-line client for interacting with MySQL and MariaDB database servers. It allows users to execute SQL statements, perform administrative tasks, import/export data, and retrieve query results directly from the terminal.<br><br>This versatile tool is indispensable for database administrators (DBAs) for maintenance, monitoring, and troubleshooting, as well as for developers to test queries, manage schema, and interact with their applications' backend data.<br><br>It supports both interactive mode, where users type SQL queries line by line, and non-interactive mode, where SQL commands are provided as arguments or piped from files. The <b>mysql</b> client is part of the standard MySQL client package, making it widely available on systems where MySQL is installed or its client libraries are present. Its robustness and flexibility make it a cornerstone for managing MySQL databases from the command line.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using the <b>-p</b><i>password</i> option on the command line is generally <i>insecure</i> as the password can be visible in process lists (e.g., via <b>ps</b> command history). It is recommended to use the <b>-p</b> option without a password to be prompted, or configure a <b>~/.my.cnf</b> file for secure credentials.<br><br>For very large result sets, running <b>mysql</b> without options like <b>--batch</b> or <b>--quick</b> can consume significant memory and potentially cause client-side performance issues or crashes.<br><br>Firewall rules or network configurations can prevent the <b>mysql</b> client from connecting to remote database servers.


title: INTERACTIVE MODE
content:
When <b>mysql</b> is run without the <b>-e</b> or <b>--batch</b> options and without input redirection, it enters interactive mode. In this mode, it displays a <b>mysql></b> prompt, allowing users to type SQL statements line by line, which are executed upon pressing Enter and terminating with a semicolon (<b>;</b>), <b>\g</b>, or <b>\G</b>.


title: SCRIPTING WITH MYSQL
content:
The <b>mysql</b> command is extensively used in shell scripts for automation. SQL commands can be supplied via the <b>-e</b> option or by piping a file into standard input (e.g., <b>mysql < script.sql</b>). Combining it with options like <b>--batch</b> or <b>--skip-column-names</b> makes output highly suitable for parsing by other scripting tools.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
Users can store connection parameters and client options in configuration files, typically <b>~/.my.cnf</b> in their home directory. This allows for more secure storage of passwords and simplifies common connections, avoiding the need to type long command-line options repeatedly.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>mysql</b> command-line client is a core component of the MySQL database system, which was originally developed by MySQL AB. It was first released in 1995. Over the years, as MySQL gained popularity as a leading open-source relational database management system, the <b>mysql</b> client evolved to support new features, improve performance, and enhance usability.<br><br>Following MySQL AB's acquisition by Sun Microsystems in 2008, and then Oracle Corporation in 2010, development of the <b>mysql</b> client continued under Oracle. Its design has largely remained consistent, serving as the canonical way for users and scripts to interact with a MySQL server, a testament to its robust and effective design from its early days.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<b>mysqldump</b>(1), <b>mysqlimport</b>(1), <b>mysqladmin</b>(1), <b>mysqlshow</b>(1), <b>mariadb</b>(1)


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>No direct command-line options</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The <b>mysql_secure_installation</b> script is interactive. It does not accept command-line parameters or arguments in the traditional sense. Instead, it prompts the user for input during its execution to configure security settings.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mysql_secure_installation</b> command is a crucial script designed to enhance the security of your newly installed MySQL or MariaDB database server. It guides you through a series of interactive prompts, allowing you to configure essential security measures that prevent common vulnerabilities. Typically, after installing a fresh database server, this command is the first step to harden its security posture.<br><br>The script's prompts generally include:<br><i>1. Setting a strong root password</i>: Crucial for administrative access.<br><i>2. Removing anonymous users</i>: These users have limited privileges but can be a security risk.<br><i>3. Disallowing remote root login</i>: Prevents the superuser from connecting from external machines, reducing the attack surface.<br><i>4. Removing the 'test' database and access to it</i>: The 'test' database is often included by default for development and testing, but it's unnecessary and potentially insecure in a production environment.<br><i>5. Reloading privilege tables</i>: Applies the changes made during the session immediately. <br><br>Running this command is highly recommended for all new database installations to establish a baseline of security practices.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>mysql_secure_installation</b> requires root privileges or <b>sudo</b> to execute, as it modifies system-level database configurations. It must be run directly on the database server machine. Users should carefully review each prompt and understand its implications before confirming, as these changes directly impact the security and accessibility of the database. This script only secures the MySQL/MariaDB server itself and does not configure security for client applications, web interfaces (like <b>phpMyAdmin</b>), or the operating system.


title: INTERACTIVE PROMPTS OVERVIEW
content:
During its execution, <b>mysql_secure_installation</b> guides you through several key security questions:<br>1. <b>Validate Password Component</b>: Option to install a plugin for password strength checking.<br>2. <b>Change the root password?</b>: Sets a new password for the 'root' user.<br>3. <b>Remove anonymous users?</b>: Eliminates default anonymous user accounts.<br>4. <b>Disallow root login remotely?</b>: Prevents the 'root' user from connecting from any host other than 'localhost'.<br>5. <b>Remove test database and access to it?</b>: Deletes the 'test' database and associated privileges.<br>6. <b>Reload privilege tables now?</b>: Applies all the changes made during the session.


title: PREREQUISITES
content:
Ensure the MySQL or MariaDB server is running before executing <b>mysql_secure_installation</b>. You will need to know the current 'root' password (which might be empty or temporarily set on a fresh installation) to proceed.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>mysql_secure_installation</b> utility has been an integral part of MySQL and MariaDB distributions for many years. It was introduced to provide a standardized, user-friendly, and interactive way to apply initial security hardening steps immediately after a fresh database server installation. Its core functionality and interactive prompts have remained largely consistent across versions, making it a reliable tool for basic database security.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<b>mysql(1)</b>: The MySQL command-line client for interacting with the database., <b>mysqld(8)</b>: The MySQL server daemon, the main database process., <b>mysqladmin(1)</b>: A client for performing administrative operations on the MySQL server., <b>mariadb-install-db(1)</b>: (MariaDB specific) A script used to initialize the MariaDB data directory.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<br><b>mysqladmin</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>command</i> [<i>arguments</i>]<br><br>Common invocation examples:<br><b>mysqladmin</b> <i>--user=root --password</i> <b>status</b><br><b>mysqladmin</b> <i>-h localhost -u admin -p</i> <b>create</b> <i>new_database</i><br><b>mysqladmin</b> <i>ping</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b> or <b>--host</b>=<<i>hostname</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connect to MySQL server on the given host.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> or <b>--user</b>=<<i>username</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;MySQL user name to use when connecting to the server.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> or <b>--password</b>[=<<i>password</i>>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Password to use when connecting to the server. If not specified, <i>mysqladmin</i> prompts for it.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> or <b>--port</b>=<<i>port_num</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;TCP/IP port number for the connection.<br><br><b><b>-S</b> or <b>--socket</b>=<<i>path</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For connections to <i>localhost</i>, the Unix socket file to use.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> or <b>--silent</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Silent mode. Produce less output.<br><br><b><b>-v</b> or <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Verbose mode. Produce more output about what the program does.<br><br><b><b>--connect-timeout</b>=<<i>seconds</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum number of seconds before connection timeout.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b>[=<<i>debug_options</i>>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write a debugging log.<br><br><b><b>--force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Don't ask for confirmation for destructive commands like <i>drop database</i>. Use with extreme caution.<br><br><b><b>--ssl-ca</b>=<<i>path</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to a file in PEM format containing a list of trusted SSL Certificate Authorities.<br><br><b><b>--ssl-cert</b>=<<i>path</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the client's X509 certificate in PEM format.<br><br><b><b>--ssl-key</b>=<<i>path</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the client's X509 private key in PEM format.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mysqladmin</i> is a command-line client for performing administrative operations on a MySQL server. It provides a convenient way to execute common tasks such as checking the server's status, creating or dropping databases, reloading privilege tables, shutting down the server, and performing various diagnostic checks.<br><br>It connects to the MySQL server, executes the specified command, and then disconnects. This tool is essential for database administrators and developers needing to manage MySQL instances programmatically or from scripts without directly logging into the MySQL client console.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <b>mysqladmin</b> requires appropriate MySQL user privileges for the operations being performed. For instance, dropping a database requires the <i>DROP</i> privilege for that database. Supplying passwords directly on the command line (e.g., <i>-pMySecret</i>) is insecure as it may be visible to other users via process lists (like <i>ps</i>) and stored in shell history files. It is recommended to use <i>-p</i> to be prompted for the password interactively.


title: COMMON MYSQLADMIN COMMANDS
content:
The following are the most frequently used commands that can be passed as arguments to <b>mysqladmin</b> to perform specific actions:<br><br><b>ping</b>: Checks if the MySQL server is alive.<br><b>status</b>: Shows a short server status message.<br><b>version</b>: Displays server version information.<br><b>shutdown</b>: Shuts down the MySQL server. Requires <i>SHUTDOWN</i> privilege.<br><b>create</b> <i>databasename</i>: Creates a new database. Requires <i>CREATE</i> privilege.<br><b>drop</b> <i>databasename</i>: Drops (deletes) a database. This action is irreversible. Requires <i>DROP</i> privilege. Use with <b>--force</b> for non-interactive deletion.<br><b>reload</b>: Reloads the grant tables (privileges). Same as <b>flush-privileges</b>. Requires <i>RELOAD</i> privilege.<br><b>flush-privileges</b>: Reloads the grant tables (privileges). Same as <b>reload</b>.<br><b>flush-hosts</b>: Flushes the host cache table.<br><b>flush-logs</b>: Flushes all logs (binary, error, general, slow query).<br><b>processlist</b>: Shows the currently running MySQL server processes. Requires <i>PROCESS</i> privilege.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>mysqladmin</b> has been a fundamental part of the MySQL distribution since its early versions. It was designed as a lightweight, command-line tool for essential server management, complementing the main <b>mysql</b> client. Its functionality and interface have remained remarkably consistent over decades, reflecting its core utility for quick administrative tasks.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-d, --database=<db_name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists only events for the specified database.<br><br><b>-f, --force-if-is-tty</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force output even if it seems to be a TTY, useful when piping output.<br><br><b>-r, --result-file=<file_name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Directs output to the specified file instead of standard output.<br><br><b>-s, --short-form</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays events in a shorter format, showing only the event data.<br><br><b>--start-datetime=<datetime></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts reading events from the specified timestamp.<br><br><b>--stop-datetime=<datetime></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Stops reading events at the specified timestamp.<br><br><b>--start-position=<pos></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts reading from a specific byte offset within the log file.<br><br><b>--stop-position=<pos></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Stops reading at a specific byte offset within the log file.<br><br><b>--read-from-remote-server</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects to a running MySQL server to read binary logs directly, bypassing local file access.<br><br><b>--base64-output={NEVER|DECODE-ROWS|AUTO}</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Controls how row-based events are displayed. <b>DECODE-ROWS</b> decodes them into SQL.<br><br><b>--include-gtids=<list></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes only events corresponding to the specified GTID set.<br><br><b>--exclude-gtids=<list></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Excludes events corresponding to the specified GTID set.<br><br><b>--raw</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes raw binary log events to one or more files, without decoding.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mysqlbinlog</b> command-line utility is an essential tool for working with MySQL's binary log files. These logs contain a record of all data-modifying events (SQL statements, row changes) that occur on a MySQL server, making them crucial for <i>replication</i> and <i>point-in-time recovery</i>.<br><br><b>mysqlbinlog</b> processes these binary files and outputs their contents in a human-readable format, typically as SQL statements that can be re-executed. It supports various filtering options, allowing users to extract specific events based on time, position, database, or server ID. This utility is invaluable for debugging replication issues, auditing database changes, or restoring a database to a specific point in time by replaying the logged events.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When using <b>mysqlbinlog</b> for <i>point-in-time recovery</i>, ensure you have a full backup taken before the target recovery point. The output, especially with row-based replication, can be extensive and complex. Piping directly to the <b>mysql</b> client (e.g., <code>mysqlbinlog binlog.000001 | mysql -u root -p</code>) should be done with extreme caution, as it executes the decoded SQL statements immediately. Be aware of potential character set issues when restoring logs to a different server or database.


title: COMMON USAGE SCENARIOS
content:
<ul><li><b>Point-in-Time Recovery:</b> Restoring a database to a specific moment by replaying binary log events after a full backup.</li><li><b>Replication Debugging:</b> Examining specific events to understand and resolve replication inconsistencies or failures.</li><li><b>Auditing:</b> Analyzing database changes made during a particular period, useful for security and compliance.</li><li><b>Data Migration:</b> Occasionally used to apply a subset of changes from one server to another, though more specialized tools exist for this.</li></ul>


title: REMOTE SERVER READING
content:
The <code>--read-from-remote-server</code> option allows <b>mysqlbinlog</b> to connect to a running MySQL server and stream its binary logs directly. This is particularly useful for analyzing logs on a remote server without needing direct file system access, or for continuous log monitoring. It requires appropriate MySQL user permissions (e.g., <code>REPLICATION CLIENT</code>, <code>REPLICATION SLAVE</code>) on the remote server.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>mysqlbinlog</b> utility has been an integral part of the MySQL ecosystem since its early versions, evolving in parallel with MySQL's replication capabilities. Its development reflects changes in binary log formats, including the transition from statement-based to row-based and mixed logging, and the introduction of Global Transaction Identifiers (GTIDs). It remains a cornerstone for database administrators managing highly available and replicated MySQL environments.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>mysqlcheck</i> [<i>options</i>] <i>db_name</i> [<i>tbl_name</i>...]<br><i>mysqlcheck</i> [<i>options</i>] <i>--databases</i> <i>db_name</i>...<br><i>mysqlcheck</i> [<i>options</i>] <i>--all-databases</i><br><br>Common Options: <br><b>-u</b> <i>user</i>, <b>--user=</b><i>user</i> <br><b>-p</b>[<i>password</i>], <b>--password</b>[=<i>password</i>] <br><b>-h</b> <i>host_name</i>, <b>--host=</b><i>host_name</i> <br><b>--all-databases</b> <br><b>--analyze</b> <br><b>--auto-repair</b> <br><b>--check</b> <br><b>--optimize</b> <br><b>--repair</b> <br><b>--quick</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--all-databases, -A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Process all databases accessible by the specified user.<br><br><b>--analyze, -a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Analyzes the key distribution of tables to improve query performance. Equivalent to <i>ANALYZE TABLE</i>.<br><br><b>--auto-repair</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;If a checked table is found to be corrupted, automatically repair it. This option implies <i>--check</i>.<br><br><b>--check, -c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks tables for errors. Equivalent to <i>CHECK TABLE</i>.<br><br><b>--check-only-changed, -C</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks only tables that have changed since the last check or that have not been closed properly.<br><br><b>--compress</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compresses all information sent between the client and the server if both support compression.<br><br><b>--databases, -B</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treats all name arguments after <i>--databases</i> as database names. Performs the operation on all tables within those databases.<br><br><b>--force, -f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Continues even if an SQL error occurs during processing a table or database.<br><br><b>--host, -h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects to the MySQL server on the specified host.<br><br><b>--optimize, -o</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optimizes tables by reclaiming wasted space and defragmenting data files. Equivalent to <i>OPTIMIZE TABLE</i>.<br><br><b>--password[=password], -p[password]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The password to use when connecting to the server. If <i>=password</i> is omitted, <i>mysqlcheck</i> prompts for a password.<br><br><b>--port, -P</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The TCP/IP port number to use for the connection.<br><br><b>--quick, -q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For <i>--check</i>, performs a quicker check. For <i>--repair</i>, performs a quicker repair without sorting rows.<br><br><b>--repair, -r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Repairs corrupted tables. Equivalent to <i>REPAIR TABLE</i>.<br><br><b>--silent, -s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress output (except for errors). Only prints error messages.<br><br><b>--socket, -S</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The Unix socket file to use for connection (on localhost).<br><br><b>--tables, -t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overrides <i>--all-databases</i> or <i>--databases</i>; treats subsequent names as table names. Must be the first option after <i>mysqlcheck</i>.<br><br><b>--user, -u</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The MySQL user name to use when connecting to the server.<br><br><b>--verbose, -v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produce more verbose output. Use <i>-vv</i> for even more verbose output.<br><br><b>--version, -V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mysqlcheck</i> is a command-line utility used for performing maintenance operations on <b>MySQL</b> database tables. Unlike <i>myisamchk</i>, which operates directly on MyISAM table files while the server is stopped, <i>mysqlcheck</i> connects to a running MySQL server. This client-server approach allows it to work with various storage engines, including <b>InnoDB</b>, <b>MyISAM</b>, and others, making it an essential tool for database administrators. <br><br>It can be used to <b>check</b> tables for errors, <b>analyze</b> table key distribution to improve query performance, <b>optimize</b> tables by reclaiming wasted space and defragmenting data files, and <b>repair</b> corrupted tables. These operations are crucial for maintaining database health, performance, and data integrity. While it shares functionality with SQL commands like <i>CHECK TABLE</i>, <i>ANALYZE TABLE</i>, <i>OPTIMIZE TABLE</i>, and <i>REPAIR TABLE</i>, <i>mysqlcheck</i> provides a convenient command-line interface for scripting and automated maintenance tasks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>mysqlcheck</i> requires a running <b>MySQL</b> server to operate, as it connects to the server to perform its tasks. <br><br>While <i>mysqlcheck</i> can perform repair operations, especially on <b>MyISAM</b> tables, <b>repairing InnoDB tables</b> using <i>mysqlcheck --repair</i> or the equivalent <i>REPAIR TABLE</i> SQL statement is often a no-op or limited. InnoDB tables are designed for self-healing and crash recovery; severe corruption often requires more drastic measures like restoring from a backup, or using <i>ALTER TABLE ... FORCE</i> or <i>mysqlpump/mysqldump</i> followed by a restore. <br><br>Operations like <b>--analyze</b>, <b>--optimize</b>, and <b>--repair</b> typically acquire <b>write locks</b> on tables, which can block other operations and impact application availability, especially on busy production systems. <b>--check</b> operations acquire <b>read locks</b>. Always test these operations in a non-production environment first and schedule them during off-peak hours.


title: <B>USAGE MODES AND MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE OPTIONS</B>
content:
<i>mysqlcheck</i> supports several primary maintenance modes: <b>--check</b>, <b>--analyze</b>, <b>--optimize</b>, and <b>--repair</b>. These options are generally mutually exclusive; if you specify more than one, the last one specified on the command line typically takes precedence, or a combination might execute in a specific order (e.g., <i>--auto-repair</i> implies <i>--check</i> first). It's best practice to run them separately if precise control over each operation is needed.


title: <B>SECURITY WITH PASSWORDS</B>
content:
When providing passwords, avoid using the <b>-p<i>password</i></b> format directly on the command line, as it makes the password visible in system process lists (e.g., <i>ps -ef</i>). The recommended and more secure method is to use <b>-p</b> (without an immediate password) which prompts you to enter the password interactively. Alternatively, use a configuration file for credentials.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>mysqlcheck</i> emerged as a necessary utility in the <b>MySQL</b> ecosystem to perform table maintenance through the server, addressing the limitations of direct file-based utilities like <i>myisamchk</i>. As <b>InnoDB</b> gained prominence and became the default storage engine in MySQL 5.5, a server-side utility capable of interacting with InnoDB's transactional nature became even more critical. <i>mysqlcheck</i> provides a unified command-line interface for database administrators to manage tables across different storage engines, integrating seamlessly with the MySQL client-server architecture. Its development reflects the ongoing need for robust and flexible database maintenance tools.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--basedir=</b><i>path</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the base directory of the MySQL installation.<br><br><b><b>--datadir=</b><i>path</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the directory where MySQL stores its databases and tables.<br><br><b><b>--port=</b><i>num</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the TCP/IP port number that the server listens on for network connections (default: 3306).<br><br><b><b>--socket=</b><i>path</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Unix socket file path for local connections (default: /tmp/mysql.sock).<br><br><b><b>--user=</b><i>name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Runs the <b>mysqld</b> process as the specified system user for security reasons.<br><br><b><b>--log-error=</b><i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Directs server error messages and startup information to the specified file.<br><br><b><b>--pid-file=</b><i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path for the file where the server writes its process ID (PID).<br><br><b><b>--defaults-file=</b><i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads default options from the specified configuration file instead of standard locations.<br><br><b><b>--skip-networking</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables TCP/IP networking, allowing connections only through the Unix socket file (for local access).<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with all supported options and exits.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the server version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mysqld</b> command is the primary executable for the MySQL database server. It is the core daemon process that runs in the background, listening for client connections, managing data storage, and processing all database queries. When <b>mysqld</b> is running, it handles tasks such as creating, reading, updating, and deleting data, managing users and permissions, and ensuring data integrity. It's the central component that makes the MySQL/MariaDB database system functional, allowing applications and users to interact with their databases.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Running <b>mysqld</b> directly from the command line is generally not recommended for production environments. It's often better to use wrapper scripts like <b>mysqld_safe</b> or system service managers (like <b>systemd</b> or <b>SysVinit</b>) for proper management, logging, and process control. Security is paramount: ensure <b>mysqld</b> runs as a dedicated, unprivileged user. Be mindful of resource consumption (memory, CPU, disk I/O) as the database workload increases.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
<b>mysqld</b> typically reads its configuration from files named `my.cnf` or `mysqld.cnf` located in standard paths (e.g., `/etc/my.cnf`, `/etc/mysql/my.cnf`, `~/.my.cnf`, or the data directory). These files allow persistent configuration settings without needing to specify them on the command line every time.


title: RUNNING <B>MYSQLD</B>
content:
While <b>mysqld</b> can be invoked directly, it's commonly started via `mysqld_safe` (a wrapper script that adds safety features like error logging and restart capabilities) or, more often on modern Linux systems, managed as a service using `systemctl start mysql` (or `mariadb`) which handles the intricacies of process management, logging, and startup/shutdown.


title: HISTORY
content:
MySQL was originally created by MySQL AB, a Swedish company, in the mid-1990s. Its core daemon, <b>mysqld</b>, quickly became a cornerstone of the LAMP (Linux, Apache, MySQL, PHP/Perl/Python) stack, driving countless web applications. Acquired by Sun Microsystems in 2008 and subsequently by Oracle in 2010, its open-source nature led to the creation of forks like MariaDB, which also uses a very similar <b>mysqld</b> daemon, maintaining much of the original command's functionality and interface.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mysqldump</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>db_name</i> [<i>tbl_name</i> ...]]<br><br><b>Examples:</b><br><i>mysqldump</i> <b>-u</b> <i>root</i> <b>-p</b> <b>--all-databases</b> > <i>all_databases_backup.sql</i><br><i>mysqldump</i> <b>-u</b> <i>user</i> <b>-p</b> <i>mydatabase</i> > <i>mydatabase_backup.sql</i><br><i>mysqldump</i> <b>-u</b> <i>user</i> <b>-p</b> <i>mydatabase</i> <i>table1</i> <i>table2</i> > <i>selected_tables_backup.sql</i><br><i>mysqldump</i> <b>-u</b> <i>user</i> <b>-p</b> <b>--single-transaction</b> <i>mydatabase</i> | <i>gzip</i> > <i>mydatabase_backup.sql.gz</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-u</b> <i>user</i>, <b>--user=</b><i>user</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The MySQL user to connect as.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>[<i>password</i>], <b>--password</b>[=<i>password</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The password for the specified user. If omitted, the user will be prompted for a password. Providing it directly in the command line is generally insecure.<br><br><b><b>-h</b> <i>host</i>, <b>--host=</b><i>host</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The host name or IP address of the MySQL server to connect to.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> <i>port_num</i>, <b>--port=</b><i>port_num</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The TCP/IP port number to use for the connection.<br><br><b><b>-A</b>, <b>--all-databases</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump all databases. This option will cause all databases on the server to be included in the output.<br><br><b><b>-B</b> <i>db_name</i> ..., <b>--databases=</b><i>db_name</i> ...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump several databases. The names are listed following the option, separated by spaces.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--no-data</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump only the database schema (table creation statements), without any row data.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--no-create-info</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump only the row data, without any table creation statements (schema).<br><br><b><b>--single-transaction</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a consistent snapshot by issuing a <i>START TRANSACTION</i> statement before dumping data. This option is useful for InnoDB tables as it avoids locking the tables during the dump, allowing other connections to continue operations. It does not work for MyISAM or MEMORY tables.<br><br><b><b>-R</b>, <b>--routines</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include stored routines (procedures and functions) in the dump output.<br><br><b><b>--triggers</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include triggers for tables in the dump output. (This is enabled by default unless <i>--no-create-info</i> is used).<br><br><b><b>-E</b>, <b>--events</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include scheduled events in the dump output.<br><br><b><b>--master-data</b>[=<i>value</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Records the binary log position and file name in the output, which is useful for setting up a replication slave. <i>value=2</i> (default) adds the position as a commented line; <i>value=1</i> adds it as an executable SQL statement.<br><br><b><b>--add-drop-database</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add a <i>DROP DATABASE IF EXISTS</i> statement before each <i>CREATE DATABASE</i> statement in the output.<br><br><b><b>--add-drop-table</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add a <i>DROP TABLE IF EXISTS</i> statement before each <i>CREATE TABLE</i> statement in the output. (This is enabled by default).<br><br><b><b>--ignore-table=</b><i>db_name.tbl_name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not dump the specified table. This option can be used multiple times.<br><br><b><b>--where=</b>"<i>condition</i>"</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump only rows selected by the given <i>WHERE</i> condition. The condition must be quoted.<br><br><b><b>-C</b>, <b>--compress</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compress all information sent between the client and the server.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>mysqldump</i> is a command-line utility used for backing up MySQL and MariaDB databases. It exports a database's schema and data as SQL statements, which can then be used to recreate the database or restore it to a previous state. This makes it an invaluable tool for disaster recovery, database migration, and cloning.<br><br>The output generated by <i>mysqldump</i> typically consists of <i>CREATE DATABASE</i>, <i>CREATE TABLE</i>, and <i>INSERT</i> statements, along with other schema definitions like views, stored procedures, functions, events, and triggers. By default, it adds <i>DROP TABLE IF EXISTS</i> before each <i>CREATE TABLE</i> statement, ensuring a clean slate upon restoration.<br><br>It can dump entire database servers (all databases), specific databases, or even selected tables within a database. For transactional storage engines like InnoDB, <i>mysqldump</i> can leverage options like <i>--single-transaction</i> to perform a consistent backup without locking tables, which is crucial for busy production environments. For MyISAM tables, however, full table locks are typically required during the dump process.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <i>mysqldump</i> is versatile, it has limitations, especially for very large databases. Performing a dump can be I/O intensive and time-consuming, potentially blocking writes (for MyISAM tables) or causing high load during the process. For massive databases, physical backup methods like Percona XtraBackup or MariaDB's MariaBackup are often preferred for their speed and ability to perform hot backups without blocking writes on any storage engine. Additionally, be cautious when using the <b>-p</b> option by providing the password directly on the command line, as it can expose credentials in process lists.


title: BACKUP AND RESTORATION STRATEGY
content:
<i>mysqldump</i> creates logical backups (SQL statements), which are flexible for cross-version compatibility and schema manipulation. To restore a backup, you typically pipe the SQL file back into the <i>mysql</i> client:<br><i>mysql</i> <b>-u</b> <i>user</i> <b>-p</b> <i>database_name</i> &lt; <i>backup.sql</i><br>For restoring all databases from an <b>--all-databases</b> dump:<br><i>mysql</i> <b>-u</b> <i>root</i> <b>-p</b> &lt; <i>all_databases_backup.sql</i><br>For large dumps, it's often more efficient to use <i>source</i> command within <i>mysql</i> client or ensure sufficient memory.


title: COMPRESSED BACKUPS
content:
To save disk space, the output of <i>mysqldump</i> can be directly piped to a compression utility like <i>gzip</i> or <i>bzip2</i>:<br><i>mysqldump</i> <b>-u</b> <i>user</i> <b>-p</b> <i>mydatabase</i> | <i>gzip</i> > <i>mydatabase_backup.sql.gz</i><br>To restore from a compressed file:<br><i>gunzip</i> &lt; <i>mydatabase_backup.sql.gz</i> | <i>mysql</i> <b>-u</b> <i>user</i> <b>-p</b> <i>mydatabase</i>


title: EXCLUDING TABLES
content:
To exclude specific tables from a database dump, use the <b>--ignore-table</b> option. This is particularly useful for excluding large log tables or caches:<br><i>mysqldump</i> <b>-u</b> <i>user</i> <b>-p</b> <i>mydatabase</i> <b>--ignore-table</b>=<i>mydatabase.log_table</i> <b>--ignore-table</b>=<i>mydatabase.cache_table</i> > <i>mydatabase_filtered_backup.sql</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>mysqldump</i> has been a core utility of the MySQL database system since its early days, evolving alongside the database server itself. Its initial purpose was to provide a simple, human-readable, and portable way to back up databases, which it continues to excel at. Over time, new options like <b>--single-transaction</b> were added to support transactional engines like InnoDB more efficiently, and features for replication (<b>--master-data</b>) and advanced schema objects (routines, events, triggers) were integrated to maintain its relevance as a comprehensive logical backup solution. Its widespread adoption across various MySQL and MariaDB versions highlights its enduring utility.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mysqlsh</b> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] [<I>connection_string</I> | <I>user</I>@<I>host</I>[:<I>port</I>][/<I>database</I>]]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help, -?</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays comprehensive help information about the command options.<br><br><b>--version, -V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the <b>mysqlsh</b> version number.<br><br><b>--host=<I>hostname</I>, -h <I>hostname</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the MySQL server hostname or IP address to connect to.<br><br><b>--port=<I>port_num</I>, -P <I>port_num</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the TCP/IP port number for the connection to the MySQL server.<br><br><b>--user=<I>username</I>, -u <I>username</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects to the MySQL server as the specified user.<br><br><b>--password[=<I>password</I>], -p[<I>password</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prompts for a password if none is given, or uses the provided password for the connection.<br><br><b>--socket=<I>path</I>, -S <I>path</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects via the specified Unix domain socket file (primarily for local connections).<br><br><b>--uri=<I>connection_uri</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the connection details using a comprehensive URI string format (e.g., mysqlx://user:password@host:port/database).<br><br><b>--execute=<I>statement</I>, -e <I>statement</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes the given SQL, JavaScript, or Python statement and exits.<br><br><b>--file=<I>path</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes commands or scripts from the specified file and exits upon completion.<br><br><b>--sql</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the default language mode to SQL for interactive sessions or executed files.<br><br><b>--javascript, -js</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the default language mode to JavaScript for interactive sessions or executed files.<br><br><b>--python, -py</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the default language mode to Python for interactive sessions or executed files.<br><br><b>--log-level=<I>level</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the verbosity level for logging output (e.g., <I>ERROR</I>, <I>WARNING</I>, <I>INFO</I>, <I>DEBUG</I>).<br><br><b>--json</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces result sets to be output in JSON format, overriding the default display format.<br><br><b>--result-format=<I>format</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the desired output format for result sets (e.g., <I>TABLE</I>, <I>JSON</I>, <I>RAW</I>, <I>TABBED</I>, <I>XML</I>, <I>HTML</I>).<br><br><b>--connect</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to establish a connection to the server immediately upon <b>mysqlsh</b> startup.<br><br><b>--batch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables interactive mode, making it suitable for scripting and non-interactive environments.<br><br><b>--verbose, -v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the verbosity of messages displayed during execution, providing more detailed output.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>mysqlsh</b> is the official client for MySQL, providing an an interactive command-line interface with advanced capabilities.<br>It supports three modes: SQL, JavaScript, and Python, allowing users to interact with MySQL servers using their preferred language. Beyond standard SQL querying, <b>mysqlsh</b> integrates the powerful AdminAPI, designed for managing MySQL <i>InnoDB Cluster</i> and <i>InnoDB ReplicaSet</i>, facilitating automated setup, provisioning, and monitoring of high-availability solutions. It also includes utility functions for common administrative tasks like data import/export, schema validation, and server configuration.<br>Its versatile nature makes it an essential tool for database administrators, developers, and DevOps engineers working with MySQL databases, from simple queries to complex cluster management.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Security</b>: Avoid specifying passwords directly on the command line (`-p<I>password</I>`) as they may be visible in process listings. Prefer being prompted (`-p` without an argument) or using secure configuration files (e.g., ~/.mysqlsh/connections.json or keyring).<br><b>Connection URI</b>: If using the `--uri` option, ensure that connection strings containing sensitive information are handled securely and not exposed in logs or history.<br><b>AdminAPI Requirements</b>: The advanced AdminAPI features (for <i>InnoDB Cluster</i> and <i>InnoDB ReplicaSet</i> management) have specific MySQL server version and configuration requirements that must be met for proper functionality.


title: INTERACTIVE MODES
content:
<b>mysqlsh</b> supports three interactive modes: SQL (default for `\sql`), JavaScript (default for `\js`), and Python (default for `\py`). Users can switch between modes using commands like `\sql`, `\js`, `\py` within the shell. Each mode provides language-specific functionalities and helpers, allowing for versatile interaction with MySQL.


title: ADMINAPI
content:
The shell's AdminAPI is a powerful set of functions for programmatically managing MySQL high-availability solutions. It simplifies operations such as creating, deploying, monitoring, and scaling <i>InnoDB Clusters</i> and <i>ReplicaSets</i>, significantly reducing manual configuration and potential errors in complex setups.


title: UTILITIES
content:
<b>mysqlsh</b> bundles several built-in utilities for common database tasks, accessible via the `util` global object (e.g., `util.dumpInstance()`, `util.loadDump()`, `util.checkForServerUpgrade()`). These utilities streamline administration, migration, and diagnostic workflows, enhancing productivity for DBAs and developers alike.


title: HISTORY
content:
MySQL Shell (<b>mysqlsh</b>) was introduced by Oracle with MySQL 8.0. Its primary motivation was to provide a modern, programmatic interface to MySQL, addressing the limitations of the traditional <b>mysql</b> client for advanced administration tasks and integration with scripting languages.<br>It was designed from the ground up to be the definitive tool for managing MySQL <i>InnoDB Cluster</i> and <i>InnoDB ReplicaSet</i>, making high-availability deployment and management significantly simpler and more robust. Since its inception, it has evolved to include various utility functions, enhanced output formats, and broader language support, becoming the recommended tool for complex MySQL operations.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<code>mytop [options]</code><br><br><i>Example:</i> <code>mytop -u <b>user</b> -p <b>password</b> -h <b>localhost</b> -d <b>database_name</b></code>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-u, --user=name</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the MySQL username for connection.<br><br><b>-p, --password[=pass]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide the MySQL password. If not provided, <b>mytop</b> will prompt for it. Avoid passing on the command line for security.<br><br><b>-h, --host=host</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connect to the MySQL server on the specified host.<br><br><b>-P, --port=port</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the TCP/IP port number for the connection.<br><br><b>-s, --delay=seconds</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the delay between screen updates in seconds (default is 5 seconds).<br><br><b>-d, --database=db</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the default database to use once connected.<br><br><b>-b, --batch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run in batch mode (non-interactive), typically used for scripting or output redirection.<br><br><b>-i, --idle</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show idle connections/threads in the display. By default, idle threads may be filtered.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br><b>-?, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show a help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>mytop</b> is a free, open-source, console-based monitoring program designed specifically for MySQL and MariaDB databases. It provides a real-time, interactive view of database activity, analogous to how <code>top</code> monitors system processes. Users can observe current queries, active connections, uptime, load, buffer usage, and other crucial performance metrics at a glance. It's particularly useful for database administrators and developers to quickly identify performance bottlenecks, long-running queries, or abnormal database behavior directly from the terminal. <b>mytop</b> connects to the MySQL server and periodically fetches and displays information about its status, threads, and variables, allowing for quick diagnostics without relying on graphical tools.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <b>mytop</b> is highly functional, it has a few considerations:<br><i>1. Password Security:</i> Providing passwords directly on the command line (e.g., <code>-p<b>mypass</b></code>) can expose them in process lists. It's safer to use a configuration file (<code>~/.my.cnf</code>) or allow <b>mytop</b> to prompt for the password.<br><i>2. Development Status:</i> Its development might be less active compared to some newer, more feature-rich monitoring solutions, but it remains highly effective for its core purpose.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
<b>mytop</b> can read connection parameters from standard MySQL client configuration files (e.g., <code>~/.my.cnf</code> or <code>/etc/my.cnf</code>). Parameters can be placed under the <code>[client]</code> or <code>[mytop]</code> sections, allowing for more secure password handling and simplified invocation.


title: INTERACTIVE COMMANDS
content:
While <b>mytop</b> is running, it supports various interactive commands similar to <code>top</code>. Common commands include:<br><i><b>k</b></i>: Kill a selected MySQL thread.<br><i><b>f</b></i>: Toggle full query display.<br><i><b>o</b></i>: Change the order of displayed columns.<br><i><b>d</b></i>: Change the update delay.<br><i><b>q</b></i>: Quit <b>mytop</b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>mytop</b> was created as a simple, terminal-based alternative to graphical MySQL monitoring tools, drawing direct inspiration from the Unix <code>top</code> utility. It gained popularity for its lightweight nature and efficiency in providing real-time database insights without significant overhead. Initially developed in the early 2000s, it has been maintained to support newer versions of MySQL and MariaDB, remaining a staple in many database administrators' toolkits for quick diagnostics and performance troubleshooting.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the archive attribute of the extracted files on the target MS-DOS filesystem.<br><br><b>-d <I>directory</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts files to the specified <I>directory</I> on the target MS-DOS filesystem. If omitted, files are extracted to the current directory.<br><br><b>-l</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists the contents of the ZIP archive. This is the default action if no specific files are provided for extraction.<br><br><b>-t <I>type</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the specified file attribute for extracted files. Valid <I>type</I>s include 's' for system, 'h' for hidden, and 'r' for read-only.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, listing all files as they are processed during extraction or listing operations.<br><br><b><I>zipfile</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the PKZIP archive file to be processed. This file is expected to be on an MS-DOS filesystem or a disk image.<br><br><b>[<I>file</I>...]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optional. Specifies particular files within the archive to extract or list. If omitted, all files are processed (either listed or extracted).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>mzip</b> is a utility from the <I>mtools</I> package that allows Linux users to interact with PKZIP archives located on MS-DOS filesystems, such as floppy disks or disk images. It is primarily designed to extract files from these archives or list their contents. Unlike the standard <I>zip</I> and <I>unzip</I> commands, <b>mzip</b> is specifically tailored for environments where interaction with MS-DOS specific attributes (like archive, system, hidden, or read-only) is necessary. It provides a convenient way to manage zipped data within an MS-DOS context without needing to mount the filesystem explicitly.<br><br>Its functionality is somewhat limited compared to full-fledged zip utilities but serves its niche purpose effectively within the <I>mtools</I> ecosystem, especially for legacy data or specialized system maintenance.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>mzip</b> is part of the <I>mtools</I> package, which is primarily designed for interacting with MS-DOS filesystems. Its utility is highly specialized for this purpose and it is not a general-purpose replacement for <I>zip</I> or <I>unzip</I> for standard Linux archives. It may not fully support all features of modern ZIP archives, especially those created with advanced compression methods or features not compatible with the PKZIP 2.04g standard (which <I>mtools</I> often targets due to its DOS focus). Long file names within ZIP archives extracted to actual MS-DOS filesystems might be truncated or mangled due to DOS naming conventions.


title: MS-DOS FILESYSTEM CONTEXT
content:
Unlike standard Linux zip utilities, <b>mzip</b> operates within the context of MS-DOS filesystems. This means it often expects to find the <I>zipfile</I> on an MS-DOS drive (e.g., A: or B:) or within an MS-DOS disk image. It can also handle MS-DOS specific file attributes like hidden, system, and read-only, which are less common or handled differently in native Linux filesystems.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>mzip</b> command is an integral component of the <I>mtools</I> suite, a collection of utilities developed to enable Unix/Linux systems to seamlessly interact with MS-DOS filesystems without requiring explicit mounting. Its development began in the early 1990s to address the common need for accessing data on MS-DOS formatted floppy disks. <b>mzip</b> specifically was introduced to handle PKZIP archives prevalent in the MS-DOS era. While its direct usage has diminished with the decline of physical floppy disks and dedicated MS-DOS environments, <I>mtools</I> (and thus <b>mzip</b>) remains valuable for working with disk images, emulators, or legacy systems.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>n</b><br><b>n</b> <i>&lt;version&gt;</i> | <b>latest</b> | <b>lts</b> | <b>current</b><br><b>n</b> [options] <i>&lt;version&gt;</i><br><b>n rm</b> <i>&lt;version ...&gt;</i><br><b>n bin</b> <i>&lt;version&gt;</i><br><b>n exec</b> <i>&lt;version&gt; &lt;command&gt; [args...]</i><br><b>n prune</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>&lt;version&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a Node.js version to install or use. Can be a specific version number (e.g., <i>16.14.0</i>), <b>latest</b>, or <b>lts</b>.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version of the <i>n</i> utility itself.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the command's help message and usage instructions.<br><br><b><b>lts</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An alias to install or switch to the latest Long Term Support (LTS) version of Node.js.<br><br><b><b>latest</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An alias to install or switch to the latest stable version of Node.js.<br><br><b><b>rm</b> <i>&lt;version ...&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes one or more specified Node.js versions from the system.<br><br><b><b>prune</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Cleans up cached Node.js versions that are no longer installed or used.<br><br><b><b>bin</b> <i>&lt;version&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the full path to the Node.js executable for the specified version.<br><br><b><b>exec</b> <i>&lt;version&gt; &lt;command&gt; [args...]</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes a shell command using the specified Node.js version, useful for testing.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses verbose output during operations.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--prefix</b> <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the installation directory for Node.js versions. Default is <i>/usr/local</i>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>n</i> is a simple command-line utility for managing Node.js versions on Unix-like operating systems, primarily Linux and macOS. It provides a straightforward way to install, switch between, and remove different Node.js versions. Developed as a concise shell script, it offers a fast and minimalist alternative to other Node.js version managers like <i>nvm</i> or <i>fnm</i>. The utility simplifies the process of handling multiple Node.js environments, which is crucial for developers working on projects that require specific or varying Node.js runtime versions.<br><br>When a user specifies a version, <i>n</i> downloads the pre-built Node.js binaries directly from <i>nodejs.org</i> and installs them into a designated directory, commonly <i>/usr/local</i> or a user-defined prefix. This direct approach contrasts with managers that might rely on source compilation or complex environment manipulations. <i>n</i> automatically manages the symlinks in the target <i>bin</i> directory (e.g., <i>/usr/local/bin</i>) to point to the selected Node.js version. While powerful, users must ensure their system's <i>PATH</i> environment variable is correctly configured to include this <i>bin</i> directory for the <i>node</i> and <i>npm</i> commands to be accessible from any location. Its simplicity means it does not inject shell functions or modify startup scripts, making it a "set it and forget it" tool once the initial setup is complete. It supports installing the latest stable, LTS (Long Term Support), or any specific semantic version, alongside capabilities for removing old versions and executing commands with specific Node.js runtimes.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>n</i> primarily targets Unix-like systems (Linux, macOS) and is not officially supported on Windows (though it can work in WSL).<br>It requires <b>curl</b> or <b>wget</b> for downloading Node.js binaries.<br>Installation into system-wide paths (e.g., <i>/usr/local</i>) typically requires <b>sudo</b> privileges.<br><i>n</i> does not automatically manage the system's <b>PATH</b> environment variable; users must ensure the installation prefix's <b>bin</b> directory is included in their <b>PATH</b>.<br>It does not manage Node.js package managers (<b>npm</b>, <b>yarn</b>) separately; their versions are tied to the installed Node.js runtime.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
<i>n</i> is commonly installed via npm (e.g., <i>npm install -g n</i>) or by directly cloning its Git repository and running the install script.<br>Ensure <i>npm</i> and <i>Node.js</i> are already available on your system before installing <i>n</i> via npm.


title: ENVIRONMENT CONFIGURATION
content:
For <i>node</i> and <i>npm</i> commands to be globally accessible after using <i>n</i>, the directory where <i>n</i> installs Node.js binaries (defaulting to <i>/usr/local/bin</i>) must be included in your shell's <b>PATH</b> environment variable. This typically involves adding a line like <i>export PATH="/usr/local/bin:$PATH"</i> to your shell's configuration file (e.g., <i>~/.bashrc</i>, <i>~/.zshrc</i>).


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>n</i> was created by TJ Holowaychuk as a simple, shell script-based alternative for managing Node.js versions. It gained popularity for its minimalist approach, contrasting with more feature-rich but potentially complex managers like <i>nvm</i>. Its development has focused on providing direct control over Node.js installations with minimal overhead, downloading pre-built binaries directly from <i>nodejs.org</i>. It has been actively maintained and continues to be a robust and straightforward tool for Node.js developers seeking efficiency and simplicity in managing their runtime environments.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>naabu</i> [OPTIONS] -h &lt;hosts/IPs&gt; | -l &lt;hosts_file&gt;<br><i>naabu</i> [OPTIONS] -p &lt;ports&gt; -h &lt;host&gt;<br><i>naabu</i> -iL &lt;input_file&gt; -silent


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --host</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Input hosts to scan (IPs, CIDRs, hostnames, or hosts file).<br><br><b>-l, --list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Input list of hosts from a file.<br><br><b>-p, --port</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ports to scan (e.g., 80,443,1-1024,top-100).<br><br><b>-t, --threads</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Number of concurrent host scan threads (default: 25).<br><br><b>-rate</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Packets to send per second (default: 1500).<br><br><b>-sS, --syn-scan</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform SYN scan (default, requires root).<br><br><b>-sC, --connect-scan</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform Connect scan (userspace TCP).<br><br><b>-o, --output</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;File to write output to.<br><br><b>-json</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write output in JSON format.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show verbose output.<br><br><b>-silent</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show only hosts with open ports.<br><br><b>-exclude</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exclude hosts from scan (comma-separated or file).<br><br><b>-exclude-ports</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exclude specific ports from scan (e.g., 22,139).<br><br><b>-top-ports</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scan top N common ports.<br><br><b>-ports-file</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;File containing ports to scan.<br><br><b>-interface</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Network interface to use for scanning.<br><br><b>-resume</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Resume scan from a file.<br><br><b>-retries</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Number of retries for failed packets (default: 3).<br><br><b>-timeout</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Timeout for network requests in seconds (default: 5).<br><br><b>-no-fallback</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable connect scan fallback on SYN scan failure.<br><br><b>-stats</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show statistics during scan.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Naabu is an <b>open-source</b> port scanner developed by ProjectDiscovery, designed for <i>speed and reliability</i> in network reconnaissance. It leverages a custom raw packet engine to send packets directly from the network interface, bypassing the operating system's TCP/IP stack. This unique approach enables it to scan millions of ports across hundreds of thousands of hosts in minutes, making it highly efficient for large-scale operations.<br><br>Naabu supports various scan types, including <b>SYN (default)</b> and <b>Connect</b> scans, allowing users to specify target hosts, IP ranges, or input files. It offers extensive options for customizability, such as defining port ranges, concurrency, rate limiting, and retries. Its output can be easily integrated with other security tools like <i>httpx</i> for HTTP probing or <i>nuclei</i> for vulnerability scanning. Naabu is a go-to tool for security professionals seeking rapid and comprehensive port enumeration.


